Home

FP-Sigma User`s Manual

1. Communication cassette The following types of communication cassettes can be used for 1 1 general purpose serial communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FPX communication cassette five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 1 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication RS CS control is possible FPG COM1 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a FPX communication cassette three wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 2 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible FPG COM2 System register settings In the default settings the COM port is set to computer link mode For 1 1 general purpose serial communication the system registers should be set as shown below e Settings for COM port 1 Set value Communication mode General purpose serial communication Communication format 8 bits Header No STX Baud rate setting 19200 bps Starting address for receive buffer 200 Receive buffer capacity 50 words 100 bytes 10 24 FP 10 3 Connection Examples e Settings for COM port 2 Set value Communication mode General purpose serial communication Communication format 8 bits Header No STX Baud rate setting 19200 bps
2. 3 5 0 138 unit mm in 4 5 0 1 FPG C24R2 30 0 1 181 Ex 19 e e e o 9999990999 999999905 3 5 0 138 unit mm in A 9 FP x A 3 Dimensions A 3 2 Expansion Unit FPG XY64D2T 30 0 1 181 18 0 709 60 0 2 362 90 0 3 543 4 5 0 177 unit mm in Appendix B Programming Information FP B 1 General Note B 1 General Note The explanations in this appendix often utilize FPWIN GR conventions When using FPWIN Pro for programming please note these slight differences e Hexadecimal values are represented by the prefix 16 and not H e Decimal values do not require a K prefix e Inputs and outputs are labeled slightly differently e g S vs s etc For IEC instructions please see the FPWIN Pro online help or the FPX programming manual B 2 FPS B 2 Relays Memory Areas an
3. e 00000000 00000000 Analog potentiometer VO potentiometer 0 Changes the value of DT90040 within a range of KO to K1000 V1 potentiometer 1 Changes the value of DT90041 within a range of KO to K1000 FP cadT Applicable special data registers Notation on Volume 0 DT90040 KO to K1000 Volume 1 DT90041 12 2 FPS 12 1 Analog Potentiometer 12 1 1 Application Example The data register values set with the potentiometers are sent to the clock set value area By this a clock is created that allows time setting via a potentiometer The value of special data register DT90040 that corresponds to the analog potentiometer VO is sent to the set value area SV of FPWIN GR TMXO to set the clock FPWIN GR R9010 Fo RO TMX 0 K 999 FPWIN Pro POU Header Class MV DT 90040 Identifier L Data transmission instruction sent to the set value area 0 1 second type timer Type Initial Comment EL 5 0 HINT A The value of special data register DT90040 is K999 is set as a dummy value merO TM_100ms_FB A til bTimelsOver i BOOL iSDT_Poti_vo b StartTi mer The potentiometer value stored in DT30040 is mowed to 5 0 eee iSDT Poti v0 SOE misy Ti mer
4. JOG command OF Frequency 300 Hz 300Hz YO Pulse Target value K1000 OHz Pulse output stops when target value is reached FPWIN GR XB H F1 DMV H1110 F1 DMV K300 DT302 F172 PLSH DT300 7 38 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro DUT 22 MotorDataJog DUT i Highest WORD fixed to 0000 Lowest WORD Control Code aJog i rol Code Control Code 1641110 Frequency 300 LD Body Motor Switch DataTable3 Control Code 7 39 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 4 4 Positioning Control Instruction F174 Data Table Control Positioning is performed according to the specified data table M Example When the execution condition R10 is on pulses are output from YO at a frequency of 1 000 Hz and positioning begins When 1 000 pulses have been counted the frequency changes to 2 500 Hz Positioning is then carried out according to the values of the data table Positioning stops when the pulse output stop value KO is reached Pulse output diagram Frequency speed Hz 5 000 eed Elapsed value of high speed 1 909 counter 01000 3000 8000 10000 Amount of travel Trigger R10 R903A R903C When the execution condition trigger R10 of the F174 SPOH instruction is on the high speed counter control flag R903A R903C goes on When the elapsed va
5. ub WW gt Dummy s Start COMPortSwitch n Number p Changing COM 1 from computer linkto Gre general purpose mode mw t SwitchToGenPurp gt R9032 158 MTRN ENO t ne Durnmy s Start COMPortSwitch n Number esso eoc 1 E 5277 Note When the power is turned on the operating mode selected in system register no 412 takes effect 10 38 Chapter 11 PLC Link FPX 11 1 Overview 11 1 Overview The PLC link is an economic way of linking PLCs using a twisted pair cable Data is shared between the PLCs using link relays L and link registers LD The statuses of the link relays and link registers of one PLC are automatically fed back to the other PLCs on the same network PLC link is not the default setting Therefore the setting of system register no 412 must be changed to PLC Link in order to use this function The link relays and link registers of the PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used to share data among the PLCs Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same network Likewise if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all PLCs on the same network Unit numbers and link areas are allocated using the system registers FPX FPX FPX
6. iw END esos DINT i 5 PulseStop iDINT 0 End of data table 7 62 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 5 1 Incremental Position Control Operation Plus Direction When X8 PosStartPlus turns on the pulse is output from CW output YO PulseOutCW of the specified channel CHO YO is used implicitly by F171 SPDH 0 V 24 V DO L X Start input Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Motor driver side 10000 pulses Pulse output diagram 5000Hz 10 000 pulses 500Hz 2 200 ms 200 ms 7 63 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN GR 8 R903A 12 R10 HDF R10 Positioning operation running Positioning operation start R10 R11 S R11 Positioning data table Bae Sale EU DT102 DT104 F omv F1DMV K200 DT 106 Dr109 Target value Movement amount 10 000 pulses LEM emo SERIA Control code H11 00 Duty 1 4 2596 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental CW and CCW F1DMv Ko DT 110 LJ LOLO LOLL F171 SPDH DT 100 The data table headed by DT100 is used Pulses are output from CHO TO R12 Pulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses are output from CHO R903A R10 HF R12 Positioning done pulse
7. 7 89 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 6 3 Interpolation Control Linear and Circular Using linear and circular interpolation functions perform positioning control that draws a trajectory like the one shown below The interval between the first position P1 and P2 and the interval between P3 and P4 perform control using linear interpolation The interval between P2 and performs circular interpolation control using center designation The interval between P4 and P1 performs circular interpolation control using passing position designation X axis CHO CW axis P1 0 0 P2 10000 0 5000 5000 10000 5000 P4 0 10000 P3 10000 10000 Y axis CH2 CW axis I O Allocation Positioning start Always ON Control flag CHO Control flag CH2 Circular interpolation control flag Emergency stop switch From P1 to P2 start From P2 to P3 start From P3 to P4 start From P4 to P1 start Positioning done Key Points With this program because the next action that follows circular interpolation control is linear interpolation the control code is designated with the stop mode The rotation direction during circular interpolation is the same direction for both P2 to P3 and P4 to P1 Designate the control code rotation direction with from CHO CW direction to CH2 CW direction Use the circular interpolati
8. N bHSC Ch2 Flag N bFremP2toP3Start bFromP2toP3 Start pot Sk 5850 dut DataTable2 PES e F B Br romP3toP4 Start bPosOperDone N bHSC Ch2 Flag N bFremPAtoP 1 Start bFromP4toP 1 Start X 04 bFromP4toP 1 Start GU dutDataTable1 next page 7 95 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 96 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 6 4 Continue Mode Method Example program This is an example program that continually executes the circular interpolation action Start the first point P1 0 0 overwrite the target value three times and move to final position P4 To overwrite the data after startup use the special internal relay R904F and a shift register Y axis CH2 CW axis S 500 250 Ss 2500 250 Py 2000 0 0 0 3000 0 1500 250 X axis CHO CW axis O Allocation Positioning start Control flag CHO Positioning running Control flag CH2 Positioning done Circular interpolation control flag Data setting for the controlfrom P1 to Set value change confirmation flag P2 Data setting for the controlfrom P2 to P3 Data setting for the controlfrom P3 to P4 Mode changing for stoppage R10 to R13 are used by shift register Allocation of d
9. Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt 2 1 S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 S211 2 43 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions B 7 2 Table of High Level Instructions No Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Data transfer instructions 16 bit data move S D S D 32 bit data move S D 841 S 0 1 D 16 bit data in vert and move S D S D 32 bit data in vert and move S D 5 1 S 0 1 D Bit data move D The specified one bit in S is transferred to the speci fied one bit in The bit is specified by Hexadecimal digit 4 bit data move D The specified one digit in S is transferred to the speci fied one digit in The digit is specified by Two 16 bit data move 1 2 D 51 0 52 0 1 Two 32 bit data move 1 2 D S141 1 0 1 D S241 S2 0 3 D 2 Block move 1 2 D The data between S1 and S2 is transferred to the area starting at D Block copy S D1 D2 The data of S is transferred to the all area between D1 and D2 Data read from F ROM 51 S2 D The data stored in the F ROM specified by 51 and
10. e ripe ae d obe bw 11 2 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters 11 4 Communication Mode iq oe iki rdc ACE m RH ARR HC RC 11 4 mes uae PE PREEP OC EM Ep Os EID RUE 11 5 11 2 3 Link Area Allocation 11 9 Tacl 11 10 11232 Partial Use of Link 11 11 1122 9 11 12 11 2 4 Setting the Largest Station Number for a PLC Link 11 13 11 9 i2295545Ca ed Res R EPPRDCKEROL E ep r 11 14 11 4 Connection Example 2 2 11 15 11 5 PLC Link R sponse TIME P NR RE EUIS ET PEE teri 11 18 11 5 1 Reducing the Transmission Cycle Time 11 20 11 5 2 Error Detection Time for Transmission Assurance Relays 11 21 Chapter 12 Other Functions 121 Analog Potentiometer dds 12 2 12 1 1 Application Example 12 3 TES Thermistor input FUNCHONS 222222222222 553 2255 D rerh pee eda 12 4 12 2 1 Overview of Thermistor Input 12 4 12 2 2 Loading Thermistor Temperature Data 12 6 12 8 12 31 Area for Clock Calendar Function 12 8 12 3 2 Setting of Clock Calendar Function 12 9 12 3 3 Sample Program for Fixed Schedule and Automatic Start 12 1
11. 2 5 22 Specifications 2 6 29 li SO Ne MEET 2 8 2 3 1 Transistor Output 2 8 2 3 2 Relay Output Specifications 2 10 2 4 Terminal 2 11 2 4 1 COT and 2 2 Control 2 11 247 C28F Control quere scis Rd RE pa 2 12 cabe ode err 2 13 Chapter3 Expansion el Types or Expansion UNIS IDA IRI e edere EE 3 2 cc Adding UNMIS 3 3 29 Adding Expansion UNIS 3 4 3 4 Parts and Functions of FPX Expansion Unit 3 5 35 Specifications of FPX Expansion Unit 3 6 FPX Table of Contents Chapter4 Allocation B equis 4 2 4 1 1 CE NUS ses uote 4 2 4 2 O Allocation for 0 4 3 4 2 1 FEE Dono Dni iiesesectessieptU i xxierRUerteRRUC O4 4 3 quc 4 3 22 0 FPZ Positioning UE 4 3 4 3 Allocation for FPO 4 5 4 3 1 Expansion UNIU o ab me en 4 5 489 Etre EPA RF RP 4 5 433 FPO A D Conversion Unit dee 4 6 4 3 4 FPO Thermocouple Input
12. 7 79 FP 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 5 7 JOG Operation Minus Direction While XC JOGStartMinus is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CCW output Y1 PulseOutCCW of the specified channel CHO Y1 is used implicitly by F172 SPDH Pulse output diagram XC JOG command of LJ LTL side side i Motor lt o 300Hz Y1 Pulse mum OHz FPWIN GR Data table XC wes 1 Control code 11 21 Duty 1 4 2596 48 Hz to 100 kHz Decremental counting CCW Pulse output instruction JOG operation The data table headed by DT310 is used and pulses are output from CHO Pulses are output from CHO FPWIN Pro The GVL on page 7 62 and the DUT on page 7 79 shown above apply to this program POU Header Class Identifier Type Initial Comment FALSE 06 start signal DOL A FALSE Pulse odpa COW alerted es mer ener reer eee 5 e gt VAR i DataTable1 OG Fi 1121 i i Frequency 300 25 duty 48 Hz to 100 kHz 1 Decremental CCW Pulse output instruction JOG operation The data unit type DataTable1 is used and pulses are output from CHO JOGStartMinus gt gt PUSH E EN ENO ataTable1 Control Code s Start SE 0 5 0 Channel sie 7 80 FPx 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 5 8 Emergency Stop Over
13. E The set value entered manually via the potentiometer becomes the new set value for the timer 2 m ode TimerO bStartTimer i00ms FB _ s 4 start T TimelsOver gt 15 Timer SV Eyi 12 3 FP 12 2 Thermistor Input Functions 12 2 Thermistor Input Functions 12 2 1 Overview of Thermistor Input Control units whose part number ends in TM have a leader that accepts thermistor input in place of analog volume You can connect a thermistor to this leader and load changes in the thermistor s resistance as analog input How Thermistor Input is Loaded Changes in the resistance of an externally connected thermistor are read in as changes in voltage Then an AD converter inside the microcomputer is used to load this as a digital value The converted digital value can be stored in a special data register DT90040 or DT90041 and read in by the user program Block diagram FPX Leader red Thermistor V REF VIN 00 nn Connect a thermistor to the leader Leader black 00000000_00000000___00000000_00000000 The space between the FP2 thermistor input and power connector 24 V is insulation the red side is the 3 3 V power source and the black side is connected to Vin Overall Precision Overall precision overall precision of microcomputer s built in AD conv
14. PosOperDone ess ee ma pu N Pos Oper Done 55 TEE uu EAT 7 68 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 5 3 Absolute Position Control Operation When 8 PosStartPlus is turned on pulses are output from CW output YO PulseOutCW or CCW output Y1 PulseOutCCW of the specified channel CHO If the current value at that point is larger than 22 000 the pulses are output from Y1 and if the value is smaller than 22 000 the pulses are output from YO YO and Y1 are used implicitly by F171 SPDH 0 V 24 V DO x Pulse output CW Motor driver side Motor 10 000 22 000 80 000 Regardless of the current value its movement is towards position 22 000 Pulse output diagram 4000Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz 250 ms 250 ms 7 69 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN GR 8 R903A R32 R30 HDF R30 Positioning operation running Positioning operation start R30 R31 R31 Positioning data table MM E as Fiomy 0 102 Fipmv DT104 Frowv K250 106 Control code H11 10 Duty 1 4 2596 48 Hz to 100 kHz Absolute CW and CCW Fi K22000 27108 F1DMv DT 110 LJ LOLO LOLL F171 SPDH DT 100 The data table headed by DT100 is used Pulses are output from CHO R903A R30 TO R32 HF R32 Pulse output instru
15. 0527 Notes e To minimize adverse effects from noise twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable e To protect the system against incorrect voltage from the power supply line use an insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit e The regulator on the unit is a non insulated type e If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit always make sure power is supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse 6 4 FPS 6 2 Wiring of Power Supply Isolate the wiring systems to the control unit input output devices and mechanical power apparatus Circuit breaker L10 gt Mechanical L20 power L30 gt e apparatus NO PEo e Input Output tor devices w Insulated DC power supply The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned off before the input output power supplies If the input output power supplies are turned off before the power to the control unit the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unexpected operation Be sure to supply power to a control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both 6 5 FP 6 3 Grounding 6 3 Groundin Under normal conditions the inherent noise resistance is sufficient However in sit
16. D1 D2 H e nH Master control area F MCE n Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range specified by D1 and D2 to the left or to the right Starts the master control program Ends the master control program Jump Label e Note H o H LBL nH The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there When T256 C256 and higher or R9000 and higher are used the number of steps is indicated in parentheses B 39 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions Loop Label BL nH H Hoor n s H Description The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in S End The operation of program is ended Indicates the end of a main program Conditional end The operation of program is ended when the trig ger turns on Eject Adds page break for use when printing B 40 FP B 7 Table of Instructions Symbol Description Steps Step ladder instructions Start step RN The start of program n for process control n an Start the specified process n and clear the pro cess currently operated Scan execution type Next step an Start the specified process and clear the pro NSTP n H n cess currently operated Pulse execution type Clear step sre Resets the c
17. o 1 1 3 ETX 0 1 0 0 4 EOT 0 1 4 5 0 1 1 0 5 6 JACK t 0 1 1 1 8 7 BEL D 1 5 BS N 5 ilo 1 Eu 1 4 0 LF 1 4 1 VT 1 1 0 0 FF 1 1 011 cR 1 1 1 0 E 50 1 1 1 1 fs DC DC DC3 DC NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US SPA DEL CE o DEL B 62 Index Numbers 1 1 communication computer link 9 9 general purpose serial communication 10 18 specifications 8 7 A 7 1 N communication computer link 8 2 9 14 general purpose serial communication 8 3 10 34 PLC link 8 4 11 2 specifications 8 7 A 7 A Absolute position control 7 29 programming example 7 69 Analog potentiometer 12 2 ASCII code table B 62 B Backup battery 5 10 setting system registers 5 11 Battery error alarm 5 11 BCD code table B 61 Binary code table B 61 Booting time pulse output 7 8 C C NET 8 2 Capacitive load 6 11 Circular interpolation F176 programming example 7 48 Clock calendar function 12 8 COM ports changing communication mode 10 38 communication cassette 8 6 specification with F159 10 3 Command message computer link 9 3 Commands computer link 9 6 Communication See Serial communication Computer link General purpose serial communication PLC link Communication cassette 1 5 2 5 8 5 communication modes 8
18. cess 928 to 943 DT90119 5 900119 Step ladder cess 944 to 959 DT90120 5 900120 Step ladder pro cess 960 to 975 DT90121 MW5 9001 21 Step ladder pro cess 976 to 991 DT90122 5 900122 Step ladder pro cess 992 to 999 Higher byte not used Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder pro cess When the process starts up the bit correspond ing to the process number turns on Monitor using binary display Example 15 11 7 3 O Bitno DT90100 A programming tool software can be used to write data 1 t 655 6514 6474 643 640 Process no 1 Executing 0 Not executing B 29 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC A Available N A Not available Description Reading Writing DT90123 to DT90125 5 90123 to 5 90125 Not used DT90126 5 90126 Forced Input Output unit no Used by the system DT90127 to DT90139 5 90127 to 5 90139 Not used N A N A DT90140 5 90140 DT90141 5 90141 DT90142 MW5 901 42 DT90143 5 90143 DT90144 MW5 901 44 DT90145 5 90145 DT90146 MW5 901 46 DT90147 5 90147 MEWNET WO PLC link status The number of times the receiving operation is per formed The current interval between two receiving operations value in
19. 13 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are ON Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads If the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again f the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool If the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing ON the output using the programming tool f the output indicator LED is turned ON go to input condition check f the output indicator LED remains OFF there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 3 Input indicator LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input unit Please contact your dealer If the power is not supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input d
20. 5 90083 Step ladder pro cess 368 to 383 DT90084 5 90084 Step ladder cess 384 to 399 DT90085 5 90085 Step ladder cess 400 to 415 DT90086 5 90086 Step ladder pro cess 416 to 431 DT90087 5 90087 Step ladder cess 432 to 447 DT90088 5 90088 Step ladder cess 448 to 463 DT90089 5 90089 Step ladder pro cess 464 to 479 DT90090 5 90090 Step ladder cess 480 to 495 DT90091 MW5 90091 Step ladder pro cess 496 to 511 DT90092 5 90092 Step ladder pro cess 512 to 527 DT90093 5 90093 Step ladder cess 528 to 543 DT90094 5 90094 Step ladder pro cess 544 to 559 DT90095 5 90095 Step ladder cess 560 to 575 DT90096 5 90096 Step ladder pro cess 576 to 591 DT90097 5 90097 DT90098 5 90098 Step ladder cess 592 to 607 Step ladder pro cess 608 to 623 DT90099 5 90099 Step ladder pro cess 624 to 639 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder pro cess When the process starts up the bit correspond ing to the process number turns on Monitor using binary display Example 15 11 7 0 Bit no 3 DT90060 15 7 3 1 Executing 0 0 ot executing A prog
21. NAIS is a global brand name of Matsushita Electric Works PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP gt User s Manual NAiS Smart Solutions by NAIS NAiS EE FP gt User s Manual Matsushita Electric Works Ltd ARCT1F333V3 0END 5 2003 BEFORE BEGINNING This manual and everything described in it are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Matsushita Electric Works Ltd pursues a policy of continuous improvement of the design and performance of its products therefore we reserve the right to change the manual product without notice In no event will Matsushita Electric Works Ltd be liable for direct special incidental or consequential damage resulting from any defect in the product or its documentation even if advised of the possibility of such damages We invite your comments on this manual Please email us at tech doc euro de mew com Please direct support matters and technical questions to your local Matsushita representative LIMITED WARRANTY If physical defects caused by distribution are found Matsushita Electric Works Ltd will replace repair the product free of charge Exceptions include e When physical defects are due to different usage treatment of the product other than described in the manual e When physical defects are due to defective equipment other than the distributed product e When physical defects are d
22. gt Programming example Pulses are generated from output YO at initial speed of 500 Hz a maximum speed of 5 000 Hz an acceleration deceleration time of 300 ms and a movement amount of 10 000 pulses Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz 10000 pulses 500 Hz 0 2 With 30 steps Z f 5000 500 30 steps 150 Hz t 300 ms 30 steps 10 ms With 60 steps 5000 500 60 steps 75 Hz Z t 300 ms 60 steps 5 ms Positioning data table Control code 1 H 1100 Initial speed 2 500 Hz Maximum speed 2 5 000 Hz Acceleration deceleration time 3 300 ms Target value 4 10 000 pulses Pulse stop 7 30 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function 2 3 4 Control code H constant H 0 Fixed Number of acceleration deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps can only be specified for ver 2 0 or higher Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 60 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Position control mode and output method 00 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward off reverse on 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward off reverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direc
23. 1 Setting time and date By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time be comes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by the FO MV instruction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than the FO MV instruction Example Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when turns ON FPWIN GR Inputs 0 min DF FO MV H 0 0790054 and 0 sec Inputs 12th hour 5th day Sets the time FO MV H 512 DT90055 FO MV H8000 DT90058 FPWIN Pro E MOVE i ENO 1680000 Num 0730054 Inputs 0 minutes and 0 seconds E_MOVE EN ENO 1580512 DTSO0055 i Inputs 1 hour Sth day 7 als _ E ENO 0058 Sets the time If you changed the values of DT90054 to DT90057 with the programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT90058 B 25 FP B 5 Table of Special Data Registers A Available N A Not available Address Description Reading Writing Matsushita IEC DT90058 Clock calendar 2 The correcting time is less than 30 seconds ao A By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will cont SECOS be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds correction After the correction is completed DT90058 is cleared registe
24. 4 6 435 FROG LIK Unit eR RE irks 4 6 Chapter5 Installation Important ETE RRETEREPRRSIETARRRZREETARRETARTEI PRER 5 2 52 Attachment to DIN Hal dde 5 5 5 3 Installation Using Flat Type Mounting 5 6 5 4 Installation Using Slim 30 Type Mounting Plate 5 8 5S Baloy rem 5 10 5 5 1 Ic BON aiii E EEEE TET 5 10 5 5 2 Setting System 5 lt 5 11 552 1 Setting the Battery Error Alarm 5 11 5 5 2 2 Specifying the Hold 5 12 Soe LIN 5522 0648 65 ade 5 12 Chapter6 Wiring Safety MSCONS YAT 6 2 6 2 Wiring of Power Supply 6 4 Re Sete a E eg E A ee ee 6 6 BA Wing sui e reer biel ER ARR IET 6 7 6 4 1 Photoelectric and Proximity Sensors 6 7 6 4 2 LED Equipped Reed 5 6 8 6 4 3 Two Wire Type Sensor 6 8 6 4 44 LED Equipped Limit Switch 6 9 65 Oum WMG rers rks dde d HEURE RC CR EC DER e de ilc 6 10 6 5 1 lnduciive Loads bos odios danken der ae Re 6 10 6 5 2 Capa
25. dro F FALSE 55 DataTable iPULSE ARC PASS Control Code 16410 Control code E i Speed 500 0 CW direction right 4 iTargetPos X 8660 20 pass position method i Target Pos_Y 5000 i 10 absolute iPassPos 9396 E jPassPos Y 3420 7 55 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function LD Body Center position method DUT The following DUT is predefined in the Matsushita Lib library PULSE ARC CENTER DUT ORD Bit 16 FALSE Stop TRUEz Continue Bit 12 FALSE Cw right TRUE CCW left Bit 8 FALSE Pass TRUE Center Bit 4 FALSE incremental TRUE absolut Control Code 164110 7 Control code i Speed 2000 10 CW direction right iTargetPos X 8660 11 center position method iTargetPos Y 5000 _ 10 absolute CW CCW LD Body 7 56 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 4 7 Pulse Output Control Instruction FO This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse output and setting and resetting the near home input Specify this FO MV instruction together with special data register DT90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again High speed counter control flag area of FP The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown below Control codes written with an FO
26. 7 82 7 4 6 1 Pass Position Setting Method 7 82 7 4 6 2 Center Position Setting Method 7 86 7 4 6 3 Interpolation Control Linear and Circular 7 90 7 4 6 4 Continue Mode Method 7 97 75 PWM PU 7 102 75 1 PWM Output Instruction 17 7 102 Chapter8 Communication Cassette 8 1 Communication Modes of the FP 8 2 B1 Computer LINK 8 2 8 1 2 General Purpose Serial Communication 8 3 Sko PLOC sais csi 8 4 8 2 Device Description 3 8 5 8 2 1 Cassete DIOS 8 5 8 6 8 23 Communication Specifications 8 7 Oe MESSI 8 10 5 VON ERS 8 11 84 1 Wiring EQUIPE 8 11 842 ipi iieupbtr dbenpe 8 12 B5 d 089 8 13 xii FPX Table of Contents Chapter9 Computer Link fT cT 91 1 Ouldine of Operation 9 1 2 Format of Command and Response dns ede 9 1 4 Setting Communication Parameters Bc Connec 309 gd E acd dC e ccn ede 9 2 1 1 1 Communicatio
27. Approx 3 5 mA Input points per common 32 points common Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min ON voltage Min ON current 19 2 V mA Max OFF voltage Max OFF cur rent 2 4 V DC 1 3 mA Input impedance Approx 6 8 kQ Response time OFF ON 0 2 ms or less ON OFF 0 3 ms or less Operating mode indicator LED display Transistor output specifications Insulation method Optical coupler Output type Open collector NPN Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC Operating load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4 V DC Max load current 01A Max surge current 0 5A Output points per common 32 points common OFF state leakage current 100 uA or less ON state voltage drop 0 5 Vorless Response time OFF ON 0 2 ms or less ON OFF 0 5 ms or less External power supply for Voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC driving internal imate Current circuit 15 mA or less Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Phase fault protection Thermal protection 3 6 FP 3 5 Specifications of FPX Expansion Unit Limitations on the number of points which are simultaneously ON Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temper
28. Class Identifier Initial Comment COUGAR EXTERNAL 2 Motorswiteh J B00L FALSE 0 4 YAR 4 PWM Output Control RRAY 0 1 OF INT 7 2 0 Hz 502 5 ms 500 50 duty LD Body MotorSwitch F473 PWMH H EN ENO PWM Output Control s i 2 E 7 103 FP 7 5 PWM Output Function 7 104 Chapter 8 Communication Cassette FP 8 1 Communication Modes of the FP 8 1 Communication Modes of the FP With the optional communication cassette the FPE offers three different communication modes computer link general purpose serial communication and PLC link 8 1 1 Computer Link Computer link see also chapter 9 is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC There are two different communication methods 1 1 and 1 N communication A 1 N network is called a C NET The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Computer FP gt E Command message Response message Applicable communication cassette For 1 1 communication 1 channel RS232C type part no
29. Communication cassette 2 2 N M Ug 3 Plug in communication connector gt 8 4 Wiring 8 4 Wiring The communication cassette is supplied with a communication connector which has a screw type terminal block 8 4 1 Wiring Equipment Use the following items for wiring Accessory communication connector If additional connectors are needed use the communication connector manufactured by Phoenix Contact Phoenix Contact product ID Number of pins P Model no Product no MC1 5 5 ST 3 5 1840396 Suitable wire twisted wire Size Cross sectional area AWG 28 to 16 0 08 mm to 1 25 mm2 Pole terminals with compatible insulation sleeve If you wish to use pole terminals Phoenix Contact offers the following models Product number AWG 24 Al 0 25 6 YE Phoenix AWG 20 Al 0 50 6 WH Contact AWG 18 Al 0 75 6 GY AWG 18 Al 1 6 RD Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Phoenix Contact product ID Model no Product no CRIMPFOX UD6 1204436 FPS 8 4 Wiring Screwdriver for terminal block To tighten the terminals of the communication connector use a screwdriver by Phoenix Contact product no 1205037 blade size 0 4 x 2 5 model SZS 0 4 x 2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 Nm or less 8 4 2 Wiring Method When wiring the communication cassette the fo
30. FPWIN GR g X7 HDF F1 DMV K3000 DT90044 Setthe initial value of K3000 in the high speed counter FPWIN Pro POU Header Type Initial Comment BOOL Activates the function Initial value of HSC iat 3000 FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function LD Body The E Any32 ToSpecDT instruction NC Tool Library uses the F1 instruction internally to copy PLC independent data from the 32 bit variable at input Any32 to the special data register defined by the value at input Offs The variable input Any32 is thus copied to the data register DDT 9000 Offs or DDT 90000 Offs The output flag is not used d 7 Programming example 2 Reading the elapsed value FPWIN GR 2 F1 DMV DT90044 DT100 Read the elapsed value of the high speed counter and co pies it to DT100 and DT101 FPWIN Pro GVL Class Identifier Matsushit lEC_Addres Initial Comment _ 4 GLOBAL Current 00 90044 MD5 90044 i DINT i i Address of elapsed value POU Header Class Identifier Initial Comment EXTERNAL 5 EXTERNAL Current n d i Address of elapsed value 1 VAR Read i1 Read EV Current _EY a Num j Copied i Alternatively to the E MOVE command the commands E SpecDT ToAny32 or F1 DMV can be used FP 7 3 High Speed
31. XB XC XD YO b contact L a contact Eel L 24 V Note DC Po wer supply a contact Stepping motor side b contact Moving table side When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a 2 kQ 1 4 W resistor 7 61 FPx 7 4 Pulse Output Function 0 Note The tables on this page apply to all programs in this section FPWIN GR Table of I O allocation TOW LLL Home sensor input Overrunning signal Near home sensor input Pulse output CW Positioning start signal Pulse output CCW Positioning start signal Positioning in progress Home return start signal Positioning operation start JOG start signal 4 Positioning done pulse JOG start signal High speed counter control flag for CHO FPWIN Pro GVL Class dentifier IEC_Addr lt a Comment Hi PulseOutccw H PosStartPlus 1 ositioning start signal 4 Pos Start Minus ositioning start signal H JOGStartMinus OG start signal 5 gh speed counter control i i i i flag for CHO PR ou c Initia Comment 1 Highest WORD fixed to 0000 NER Lowest WORD Control code naSpesd Esas m o tmr Maximum speed Hz 7 3 me I DINT Ps CNN
32. 7 24 FPX 7 3 High Speed Counter Function LD Body gt tse ph RS PosOperDone 435 OperstionStart HSGChOFlag gt oa Je f PosOperRunning LL SE 2 PosOperRunning gt Channel No HSCTartVal2 InverterStart GF InverterHiSpeed S PosOperRunni HSC HSCTar Val 1 PosOperRunning N 7 25 FP 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 Pulse Output Function Together with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver the pulse output function can be used for positioning control It provides trapezoidal table shaped control with the FP instruction F171 SPDH By specifying the initial speed maximum speed acceleration deceleration time and target value pulse outputs are automatically obtained F171 SPDH also allows automatic home return operation The FP instruction F172 PLSH can be used for JOG operation Pulses are output as long as the execution condition is on A target value can also be set so that pulse output stops when the target value is reached With the FP instruction F174 PLOH pulse output according to a data table and with this positioning control is possible instruction F175 SPSH is available for linear interpolation control For this the composite speed the acceleration deceleration time and the targe
33. BOOL FALSE BOOL ALSE Activates the function 3 VAR 5 TargVal iDINT 12 40000 Sets target value LD Body 1 the elapsed value for the channel set with Channel No matches the value set with HSC Targ val ouptut Output5 turns off Stat F167 HCAR p EN ENDO Channel No n d OQuput5 HSC TargVal X oium 7 18 FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function 7 3 5 Sample Programs 7 3 5 1 Positioning Operations With Single Speed Inverter Wiring example FPX Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input LL Operation start X5 OF Encoder Motor Output terminal lita Inverter operation gt 7 5 Operation Stop Operation chart allocation Oa Encoder input Operation start signal Speed Inverter operation signal Positioning operation running 0 5000 Positioning operation start Number of pulse TOME Positioning done pulse vol n High speed counter CHO control flag 7 19 FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function FPWIN GR When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90044 and DT90045 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops X5 R903A R102 R100 HDF 100 Positioning operat
34. F175 SPSH DT500 KO 7 46 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro DUT The following DUT is predefined in the Matsushita Lib library PULSE LINEAR DUT Control Code N Control code i Bit 12 Duty FALSE 25 TRUE 50 i Bit 4 FALSE Incremental TRUE Absolut Bits 0 1 CW CCW 22 PLS SIGN f d OFF 3 PLS SIGN forward ON Initial Speed Composite speed maximum Fmax Hz 1 5Hz to 100kHz X axis CHO target value movement distance 8388608 to 8388607 Y axis CH2 target value movement distance 3388508 to 8388507 OUT X axis CHO component speed maximum Fmax Hz OUT Y axis CH2 component speed initial Fin Hz OUT Y axis CH2 frequency range 0 1 2 i Control Code 1000 i Control code i Initial Speed 500 1127 Duty 25 Yo iMaximumSpeed 5000 0 Fixed i AccelDecelTime 300 100 Incremental iTargetValue X 5000 iTargetValue 2000 DataTable 7 47 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 4 6 Pulse Output Instruction F176 Circular Interpolation The circular interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table Position of specification method For the FP designate the position using one of the following methods Specification of passing position Designate the two points the target position E and the passing position S for the current position P Speci
35. FPS FPX Unit 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Send area Receive area Receive area lt j Send area Receive area Send area lt Receive area System Name Set value of various control unit registenno No 1 No 2 No 3 Range of link relays used for PLC link Start address of link relay send area Size of link relay send area Invalid allocations The allocations shown below are not possible neither for link relays nor for link registers Send area is split Receive area Send area Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments Send area Receive area Receive area Send area Send area Receive area Receive area Send area 11 12 FP 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters 11 2 4 Setting the Largest Station Number for a PLC Link The largest station number can be set using system register no 47 Sample settings No of units linked Setting contents 1st unit station no 1 is set 2nd unit station no 2 is set A largest station no of 2 is set for each 1st unit station no 1 is set 2nd unit station no 2 is set 3rd unit station no 3 is set 4th unit station no 4 is set A largest station no of 4 is set for each Nth unit station no n is set A largest station no of N is set for each se Notes e Station numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there i
36. H 1010 DT 40 Control code DT42 Composite speed Always ON F1 2000 1 DMV Dr44 P1 axis Target position chO Ft DMV DT 46 1 1 axis Target position ch2 F1 DMV K 5000 DT48 S X axis Pass position chO Ft DMV K5000 DT50 S Y axis Pass position ch2 XB R903A R903C R904E R2F R23 DF Positioning Control Control Control Positioning From start rag rag flag done P4 to HO H2 R23 P1 start From P4 to P1 start R23 H F176 SPCH DT40 From P4 to P1 start Data table R904E R2F DF Control flag Positioning XC done Emergency stop XC DT90052 Emergency stop FO MV DT90052 MV H2008 DT90052 FO MV H2000 DT90052 Positioning data table Control code Stop mode Pass position setting method From to CH2 CW direction Absolute CW CCW Composite speed 2000Hz Target position 0 0 Pass position 5000 5000 Circular interpolation start n case of R903A R903C and R904E are OFF If XB turns ON circular interpolation start Positioning done R2F is controlled by R904E which we are able to confirm whether the positioning was done or not Emergency stop If XC turns ON the output of the pulse is stopped 7 83 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro GVL 5 van GLOBAL VAR GLOBAL mg VAR EXTERNAL bHSC Ch2 Flag
37. Positioning from P1 to P2 n case of R903A R903C and R904E are OFF if XB turns ON positioning is started Positioning from P2 to P3 When R903A and R903C turns OFF circular interpolation positioning is stared b FP 7 4 Pulse Output Function R904E R21 R2F R22 Control flag From P2 to Ps From When R904E turns OFF positioning from P3 to start Ps to P4 is started R22 Pa start DF gt 1 From to P4 start 1 DMV 4 axis Target position chO F1 10000 DT 10 P4 axis Target position ch2 F175SPSH R903A R22 R2F R23 pF 4 Control flag From P3 to P4 CHO start Positioning from P4 to P1 When R903A and R903C turns OFF the data for circular interpolation positioning is started Positioning From done Ps to R903C P1 start Control flag CH2 2 LF176 SPCH DT40 R2F is controlled by R904E witch are able to confirm whether the positioning was done or not R904E R23 R2F Control flag From Pa to P1 XC stan Positioning done Emergency stop xC Fo MV H8 2 Emergency stop Emergency stop If XC turns ON the output of the pulse is Fo mv Dre052 stopped Fo Mv H2008 DT90052 Fo Mv H2000 590052 FPWIN Pro GVL Class Identifier Matsus IEC Address Type Initial
38. Ric eee ono e s J Ladder program Data register 5232 port Data area read command is e set in send buffer O 1 Data transmission with F159 MTRN 9039 off R9038 off buffer writing point reset area read command 95014 RDD00000 00001 Cg transmission O 99 Transmission done flag R9039 on D Transmission Data register value of PLC on other end is received E ul If normal 01 RD6400C8006FCR 4 Reception done flag R9038 If error occurs 01 00 Cg Data read BOC E Error code Empty data transmission with F159 MTRN Reception R9039 off and R9038 off Receive buffer writing point reset 10 27 FPS 10 3 Connection Examples FPWIN GR c o 2 E 7 c S Reception R10 R10 H F s ASC M 01 RDD00000 DT101 95 M 00001 o u DT107 F159MTRN pr100 9 Ki the contents consisting of 19 bytes of it are sent from COM port 1 K1 R9038 R11 H DF 1 4 R11 l LF10Bkwv 0201 DT208 DTO The contents of 8 words from DT201 to DT208 are written to data registers DTO to DT7 BE DT1 H2431 R12 l rz A4HEX DT3 5 R11 F159 MTRN DT 100 KO 1 Starting from DT100 the contents consisting of 0 bytes are sent from COM port 1 K1 Dat
39. Se Note In FPWIN Pro the argument n can also be a variable 7 3 4 4 Target Value Match OFF Instruction F167 GVL The global variable list applies to the two following FPWIN Pro programming examples m Class Identifier Initial var H 0 0 4 BOOL FALSE M Programming example 1 FPWIN GR If the elapsed value DT90048 and DT90049 for HDF F167 HC1R K1 K30000 Y Channel 1 matches K30000 output Y4 turns off FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier Comment Fi Fi FALSE Activates the function 1 VAR Hi start a ave 5 jChannelNo 1 Sets channel number 3 VAR aj HSC_Targ al DINT 30000 f Sets target value LD Body 1 If the elapsed value for the channel set with Channel No matches the value set with HSC Quptut4 turns off a no F187 HC1R E Channel n d Ouput4 HSC Targval uns 7 17 FPX 7 3 High Speed Counter Function gt g Programming example 2 FPWIN GR If the elapsed value XD DT90204 and DT90205 for H HDF F167 K40000 Y5 Channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns off FPWIN Pro POU Header ree Class Identifier Comment Gar EXTERNAL _ EXTERNAL Duput5
40. Starting address for receive buffer 200 Receive buffer capacity 50 words 100 bytes 10 25 FP 10 3 Connection Examples Communication format settings for FP series PLC FPO FP1 Set value Communication mode for COM port Computer link Communication format for COM port Baud rate for COM port 19200 bps Connection to FP series PLCs FPO FP1 e Using 1 channel RS232C type communication Connection with FPO COM port FPZ side 5 RD Received Data RD Connection with FP1 port FP side 5 Received Data RD cassette FPO COM port side 3 FP1 COM port side 9 e Using 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette Connection with FPO COM port FPZ side 5 Received Daai RD Ra Received Data RD To other device FPO COM port side 3 10 26 FP 10 3 Connection Examples FP1 port Connection with FP1 COM port side eon 2 gt lt Lm FPZ side 5 R1 ReceiedData RD R2 ReceiedData2 RD To other device Procedure of communication In this example an FP series PLC is connected to COM port 1 K100 and K200 are respectively being stored in DTO and DT1 of the PLC on the other end FP series PLC p asc m Ascizoeraso or J ew ov J
41. The number of data that match the searched data is stored here when the F96 SRC in struction is executed DT90038 5 90038 Operation auxiliary register for search instruction F96 SRC The position of the first matching data is stored here when the F96 SRC instruction is executed DT90039 5 90039 Not used DT90040 5 90040 Potentiometer volume input VO DT90041 5 90041 Potentiometer volume input V1 The potentiometer value KO to K1000 is stored here This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the pro gram to read this value to a data register V0 DT90040 V1 DT90041 DT90042 96 MW5 90042 Used by the system DT90043 9e MW5 90043 DT90044 96 MW5 90044 DT90045 96e MW5 90045 High speed counter elapsed value Used by the system The elapsed value 32 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing the F1 DMV instruction DT90046 9e MW5 90046 DT90047 9e MW5 90047 High speed counter target value For CHO The target value 32 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 F167 F171 F175 or F176 is executed The value can be read by executing the F1 D
42. Y is found for the input value X by performing scaling for the given data table Scaling of 32 bit data 1 S2 D The output value Y is found for the input value by performing scaling for the given data table 16 bit data upper and lower limit control 1 S2 3 D When 1 gt S3 1 gt D When S2 S3 S2 D When 1 S3 52 S3 D 32 bit data upper and lower limit control When 51 1 1 gt 63 1 S3 141 1 gt 0 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 3 S241 2 0 1 D When 51 1 S1 3 1 3 lt S241 52 53 1 3 0 1 D 16 bit data deadband control When 1 gt S3 S3 81 D When S2 lt S3 53 52 D When 1 S3 82 0 5 D 32 bit data deadband control When 1 1 1 gt S341 3 S341 53 S141 1 D 1 D When S2 1 S2 S3 1 3 0 1 D D When 91 1 1 lt S341 S3 x S241 S2 0 D 1 D 83 1 S3 S241 2 B 55 FP B 7 Table of Instructions No Name Boolean Operand Description Integer type data processing instructions 16 bit data When S3 lt 0 S3 S1 D zone control When S3 0 0 D When 3 gt 0 53 52 gt D 32 bit data When 53 1 S3 0 zone control S3 1 S3 8141 S1 gt D 1 D When 53 1 S3 0 0 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S341 53 52 1 S2 D 1 D Floating point
43. target value match OFF instruction F167 7 17 target value match ON instruction F166 7 16 Home return 7 29 operation modes 7 34 programming example 7 33 7 72 7 75 types 7 34 I O allocation 4 2 FP Sigma units 4 3 FPO units 4 5 Incremental input 7 9 Incremental position control 7 29 programming example 7 63 7 66 Incremental decremental control input 7 10 Incremental decremental input 7 10 Inductive load 6 10 Input modes high speed counter 7 9 Input specifications 2 6 Input wiring 6 7 Installation 5 2 backup battery 5 10 DIN rails 5 5 expansion units 3 3 3 4 flat type mounting plate 5 6 slim 30 type mounting plate 5 8 Installation environment 5 2 Installation space 5 4 Instructions table B 37 Interlock circuit 6 2 Internal circuit diagram 2 7 2 9 2 10 J JOG operation 7 29 programming example 7 37 7 78 7 80 L LEDs 2 3 Limit switch 6 9 Linear interpolation F175 programming example 7 44 Link area allocation PLC link 11 9 Link register 11 3 allocation 11 9 Link relay 11 3 allocation 11 9 M Memory areas B 3 MEWTOCOL COM 9 2 MEWTOCOL COM commands B 60 MIL connector wiring 6 12 Minimum input pulse width 7 10 Monitoring PLC link 11 14 Mounting plate 5 8 O Operation on error 13 2 Output specifications 2 8 Output
44. 1 The input impedance varies depending on the input terminal number Power supply voltage The wattage W of the resistor is W R IW In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W 6 9 FPS 6 5 Output Wiring 6 5 Output Wiring Protect the outputs as described below 0527 Notes 6 5 1 To prevent the output circuit from being damaged by a short circuit or other electrical problems on the output side a transistor with short circuit protection is provided Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and so that these wirings are separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together Separate the input output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm 3 937 in Inductive Loads With an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load When switching DC inductive loads with the relay output type be sure to connect a diode across the ends of the load When using an AC inductive load Varistor Output 4 terminal FPS COM Example of surge absorber R 50 Q C 0 47 uF When using a DC inductive load FPS Output terminal COM Diode Reverse v
45. 24 V DC The power supply is connected using the power supply cable AFP0581 that comes with the unit 43 Left side connector for FPX expansion units Connects a dedicated FPX expansion unit to the internal circuit of the control unit Only the FPG C32T and FPG C32TTM control units are not equipped with this connector 42 Unit number station number setting switch The unit or station number must be specified when using the communication functions provided by the optional communication cassette The unit number station number setting switch is located under the cover labelled EXPANSION CONNECTOR on the left side of the unit Specify the unit station number using the selector switch and the dial 43 Communication cassette option Optional cassette type adapter used for communication Any one of the following cassette types may be installed 1 channel RS232C type 2 channel RS232C type 1 channel RS485 type Expansion hook Used to secure expansion units The hook is also used for installation on the flat type mounting plate AFP0804 45 Right side connector for FPO expansion units Connects an FPO expansion unit to the internal circuit of the control unit DIN rail attachment lever The FP unit is easily attached to a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on the slim 30 type mounting plate AFP0811 Tip See page 12 4 for the functions
46. 7 82 x 16 4 32 1 130 44 ms Calculation example 2 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 4 71 Tpc Ttxx Pem 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms 0 096 x 13 2x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 16 4 32 5 198 44 ms 11 18 FP 11 5 PLC Link Response Time Calculation example 3 When all but one station have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been allocated evenly and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx20 096 Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms 0 096 x 13 2x 15 4 31 ms 0 96 400 0 67 5 407 ms Note The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 15 4 13 5 407 593 43 ms Calculation example 4 When all stations have been added to an 8 unit link the largest station number is 8 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 20 096 Each Pem 23 8 16 x 119 Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 119 11 43 ms Each Ts 11 43 16 43 ms 0 096 x 13 2x 8 2 79 ms Given the
47. A S2 D 16 bit data exclusive NOR 1 2 D 61 A S2 61 52 D Word 16 bit data unite Data conversion instructions 1 S2 3 D S1 IS3 v 52 53 D When S3 is HO S2 D When S3 is HFFFF 1 D Block check code calculation 1 S2 3 D Creates the code for checking the data specified by S2 and 53 and stores it in D The calculation method is specified by S1 Hexadecimal data ASCII code 1 S2 D Converts the hexadecimal data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example HABCD H 42 41 44 43 BADC ASCII code gt Hexadecimal data Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores it in D Example 44 43 42 41 HCDAB DCBA 4 digit BCD data ASCII code Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example H1234 H 32 31 34 33 214 3 ASCII code 4 digit BCD data 1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example 34 33 32 31 gt H3412 432 1 16 bit binary data ASCII code 51 S2 D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes 001 ASCII code gt 16 bit binary data Converts the ASCI
48. Clear high speed counter instructions F166 to F176 High speed counter control flag area of FP The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown below Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 DT90052 I Channel specification HO to H3 CHO to CH3 Near home input 0 off 1 on High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Hardware reset 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function 7 Programming example Performing a software reset FPWIN GR HDF FO MV 1 DT90052 FO MV DT90052 2 In the above program the reset is performed in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed FPWIN Pro POU Header Initial Comment i FALSE i Activates the function cial data register DT30052 H B E Any16 ToSpecDT N ENO Sie HSC CHO Reset Any16 Flag iem SDT HSC Control Offs ENS E_Any16_ToSpecDT EN ENO v Rie 3 HSC CHO Count Any16 Flag L SDT HSC Control _ 5 i The E_Any16_
49. DT 44 Absolute i Composite speed 2000Hz P1 X axis Target speed 0 Target position 0 0 DMV KO DT 46 Pass position 5000 5000 P1 Y axis Target speed ch2 Ft DMV 5000 DT 48 1 X axis Pass position 0 F1 DMV 5000 DT50 1 Y axis Pass position ch2 R9010 Positioning data table Hr DMV H1110 DT60 1 From P2 to Always Control code ON Control code M F1 DMV DT2 DT 62 1 Stop mode Center position setting method Composite speed F1 DMV 10000 DT64 X axis Target speed 0 Ft K 10000 DT66 P3 Y axis Target speed ch2 F1 DMV 10000 DT 68 Q X axis Center position cho F1 DMV 5000 DT70 Q Y axis Center position ch2 XB R903A R903C R904E R2F R20 From P1 to P2 start DF 1 Start the flow Control Control Con flag flag trol R20 CHO CH2 flag Position ing done From P1 to P2 start 1 F1 DMV K10000 DT8 P2 X axis Target position F1 DMV DT 10 P2 Yaxis Target position ch2 F175 SPSH DTO Data table Linear interpolation R903A R20 R2F R21 Control flag From P1 From CHO to P2 ing Peto R903C start done Ps start Control flag CH2 R21 From P2 to P3 start R21 IL F176 sPCH 1 From CHO CW to CH2 CW dierction Absolute Composite speed 2000Hz Target position 10000 10000 Center postion 10000 5000
50. Default settings Character bit 8 Bits Stop bit 1 Bit Terminator CR STX not exist Enter the appropriate settings to match the communication format of the external device connected to the COM port No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rates for the ports is 9600 bps Set the baud rate to match the external device connected to the COM port click on z and select one of the values from 2400 to 115200 bps No 416 for COM 1 port No 418 for COM 2 port Starting address for data received No 417 for COM 1 port No 419 for COM 2 port Buffer capacity setting for data received To use general purpose serial communication the receive buffer must be specified By default the entire data register area is defined as the receive buffer To change this area specify the starting address using system register no 416 no 418 for COM port 2 and the volume number of words using no 417 no 419 for COM port 2 The receive buffer layout is shown below see page 10 7 FPS 10 1 Overview Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 2 Double click PLC in the project navigator Double click System Register Double click COM Port There are separate settings for COM ports 1 and 2 No 412 COM port 1 selection Select the COM port operation mode click on El and select General purpose E Sy
51. For connecting input devices see the diagrams and recommendations given below 0527 Notes e Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity e Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and so that these wirings are separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together e Separate the input output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm 3 937 in 6 4 1 Photoelectric and Proximity Sensors Relay output type c E Sensor Power supply for sensor Power supply for input NPN open collector output type Sensor Internal circuit Power supply for input Voltage output universal output type Sensor Internal circuit Power supply for input 6 7 FP 6 4 Input Wiring Two wire output type O Input terminal Sensor FPX S 2 28 Power supply for input 6 4 2 LED Equipped Reed Switch When an LED is connected in series to an input contact such as an LED equipped Reed switch make sure that the ON voltage applied to the PLC input terminal is greater than 19 2 V DC In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series LED 19 2 V equipped FPZ Reed switch 6 4 3 Two Wire Type Sensor If the input of the PLC does not
52. Pcm 23 number of relay words number of register words x 4 2 TIt link table sending time Ttx sending time per byte x link table sending size Ttx 1 transmission speed 1000 x 11 ms approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Ltm 13 2x n n number of stations being added 3 Tso master station scan time This should be confirmed using the programming tool 4 TIk link addition processing time If no stations are being added TIk O link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tls sending time for command to stop transmission if link error occurs Tso master station scan time Tlc 10 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 transmission speed 1000 x 11 ms approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Twt Initial value 400 ms can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction Tis 7 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 transmission speed x 1000 x 11 ms approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Tso Master station scan time Calculation example 1 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms Ttx20 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 x4 71 Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 1 6 82 7 82 ms 0 096 x 13 2x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max
53. Starting address for receive buffer 200 Receive buffer capacity 50 words 100 bytes Communication format settings for Micro Imagechecker To set the communication mode and transmission format settings for the Micro Imagechecker select 5 Communication under 5 ENVIRONMENT on the main menu and set the following items No Set value Communication mode Normal Mode RS232C Baud rate bps Length Stop bit Parity Flow Control Serial communication setting for Micro Imagechecker To enter settings relating to serial communication for the Micro Imagechecker select 53 Serial Output under 5 Communication on 5 ENVIRONMENT on the main menu and set the following items Serial Output Invalid Digit Process End Numerical Calculation Output Judgment Output 10 19 FP 10 3 Connection Examples 587 Notes e If Del is specified for the invalid processing parameter zero suppression processing will be carried out on the output data and the output format will be changed Always make sure Repl 0 is specified e When outputting data to an external device numerical calculation is required so Out should be specified for the Numerical calculation parameter With the above settings the following data will be output from the Micro Imagechecker 1012845 t Terminator end code Results of numerical calculation No 1 Judgm
54. are on 77 2 mA or less Output circuit The current con sumed by the output circuits of the various units The value indi cates the current used to drive the output circuits n indicates the number of points that are on The value does not in clude the load current value 70 mA or less FPG C24 160 mA or less 77 2 mA or less FPZ intelli gent unit FPG PP11 PP12 150 mA or less 20 mA or less FPG PP21 PP22 220 mA or less 35 mA or less FPG EM1 35 mA or less FPX expan sion unit FPG XY64D2T 35 mA or less 3 5 x n mA or less 15 mA or less FPO expan sion unit FPO E8X 10 mA or less 4 8 x n mA or less FPO E8R 15 mA or less 50 mA or less 4 3 x n mA or less FPO E8YR 10 mA or less 100 mA or less FPO E8YT 15 mA or less 3xnmA or less FPO E16X 20 mA or less 4 8 x n mA or less FPO E16R 20 mA or less 100 mA or less 4 8 x n mA or less FPO E16T 25 mA or less 4 8 x n mA or less 3xnmA or less FPO E16YT 25 mA or less 3xnmA or less 2 40 mA or less 4 3 x n mA or less 3xnmA or less FPO intelli gent unit 21 20 mA or less 100 mA or less FP0 A80 20 mA or less 60 mA or less FPO TC4 TC8 25 mA or less FPO IOL 30 mA or less 40 mA or less Commu nication cassette FPG COM1 FPG COM2 20 mA or l
55. e An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed e lf using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse Before You Start FPX Power supply sequence e Make sure the power supply of the control unit turns off before the power supply for input and output If the power supply for input and output is turned off first the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unexpected operation Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below e During installation check that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit e Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct e Sufficiently tighten the installation and terminal screws e Setthe mode selector to PROG mode Before entering a program Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 Online Online Mode 2 Online Clear Program and Reset System Register 3 Choose OK in the confirmation dialog box Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 Online Online Edit Mode 2 Edit Clear Program
56. installed in the FP e There are no default clock calendar settings so the programming tool or another means must be used to specify these values There are two ways to set the clock calendar function Using the programming software Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 Press lt CTRL gt lt F2 gt to switch to the Online screen 2 Tool Set PLC Date and Time Set Date and Time Untitlel X PLC Home Date Gy mm dd a E al Cancel Time hh mm ss Help 3 Enter the date and time 4 OK Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 Online gt Online Mode 2 Monitor gt Display Special Registers gt Calendar Functions 3 Enter the desired date and time values Confirm each value with lt Enter gt Calendar Functions 1641050 Calendar i mer display hour and minute 1640000 Calendari mer setting minute and second 1640000 Calendari mer setting day and hour 1640000 Calendari mer setting year and month 12 9 FP 12 3 Clock Calendar Function Using a program 1 The date time values are written to special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 which are allocated as the clock calendar setting area 2 A value of H8000 is written to DT90058 0527 Note The values can be set using the rising edge signal P FPWIN Pro the differential instruction DF FPWIN GR or by changing H8000 to 0000 d l Exampl
57. serial data communication mode 0 to 2048 The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings Data length 8 bits odd parity stop bit 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115 200 bps B 11 FPS B 3 System Registers Unit no setting Default value 1 Descriptions 1 to 99 Communication mode setting Computer link Computer link General purpose serial communication Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled Disabled Communication format setting Data length 8 bits Parity check with odd Stop bit 1 bit Enter the settings for the various items Data length 7bits 8bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1bit 2bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General pur pose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist Communication speed Baud rate setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data communication mode 0 to 32764 Note Buffer capacity setting for data re ceived of general serial data commu nication mode 0 to 2048 The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings Data length 8 bits odd parity stop bit 1 The c
58. 0 1 D multiplication 4 digit BCD 1 S2 D 1 S2 quotient D remainder 0790015 data division 8 digit BCD 1 52 0 141 1 52 1 S2 quotient 0 1 D data division remainder DT90016 DT90015 4 digit BCD D 1 D data increment 8 digit BCD D 1 D 1 D 1 D data increment 4 digit BCD D 1 D data decrement 8 digit BCD 1 D 1 D 1 0 1 D data decrement Data comparison instructions 16 bit data S1 gt 52 R900A on 62 gt R900B on 51 lt R900C on 32 bit data S1 1 gt S2 1 S2 gt R900A comparison S1 1 8241 S2 gt R900B on ud lt 8241 S2 R900C 16 bit data band 1 52 53 S1 gt R900A on comparison ns S3 gt R900B on R900C on B 46 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions No Name Boolean 32 bit data band comparison Operand Description 1 S2 S8 8141 1 gt 53 1 3 gt R900A on 52 1 S2 lt 1 1 1 x S341 S3 gt R900B 81414 1 lt 52 1 52 gt R900C on Block data comparison Logic operation instructions 1 S2 S8 Compares the two blocks beginning with 52 and S3 to see if they are equal 16 bit data AND 1 S2 D 16 bit data OR 1 S2 D S1 S D 51 v S D 2 2 16 bit data exclusive OR 51 S2 D 61 A S2 v S1
59. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 c 2 Oo o 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B D E F e Setting unit numbers with the programming software To set unit numbers with the FPWIN Pro or FPWIN GR programming software follow the procedure below Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 Option PLC Configuration PLC Configuration 08 Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold2 Action Error Time Link High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port COMI Port COM2 Port No 410 Unit No No 412 Comm Mode Cancel Head Fils Initialize Modem Enabled No 413 Communication Fi No 415 Baudrate Char Bit Bits E Emm 71 3600 bps z Parity E Header STX not exist 1 Stop Bit Starting address for data received of serial data communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of 4 414 serial data communication mode m 022048 2 Click COM Port tab No 410 Unit no setting for COM 1 port No 411 for COM 2 port Unit No setting Click on v and select a unit number from 1 to 99 9 16 FPS 9 3 1 N Communication Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 2 3 Double click PLC in the project navigator Double click System Register Double click COM Port There are separate setti
60. 2 computer link 8 2 general purpose serial communication 8 3 installation 8 10 PLC link 8 4 specifications 8 7 types 8 5 wiring 8 11 Communication mode 8 2 computer link 9 9 general purpose serial communication 10 4 PLC link 11 4 Communication status LEDs 2 3 Computer link 8 2 9 2 1 1 communication 9 9 1 N communication 9 14 command format 9 3 commands 9 6 connection example 9 9 9 18 response message 9 4 system register settings 9 7 Connection example computer link 9 9 9 18 general purpose serial communication 10 18 10 24 PLC link 11 15 Constants B 3 Control unit 1 5 dimensions A 9 Controllable I O points 1 6 1 7 Current consumption A 3 FPS Index CW CCW output method 7 27 D Data table control F174 programming example 7 40 Decremental input 7 9 Dimensions A 9 DIN rail attachment 5 5 Direction output method 7 27 E Earthing See Grounding Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 7 14 7 59 Emergency stop programming example 7 81 Emergency stop circuit 6 2 Error operation 13 2 Error codes B 35 ERROR ALARM LED 13 4 13 7 Expansion restrictions 1 6 Expansion unit 3 2 dimensions A 10 installation 3 3 3 4 parts 3 5 specifications 3 6 F FO high speed counter function programming example 7 12 puls
61. C32T2 FPG C32T2TM Output 16 points YO to YF Input 16 points to XF FPG C28P2 Output 12 points YO to YB FPG C24R2 Input 16 points XO to FPG C24RTM Output 8 points YO to Y7 4 2 2 FPX Expansion Unit numbers do not need to be set as 1 0 allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion units is determined by the installation location Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Input 32 points X100 to X11F X180 to X19F X260 to X27F X340 to X35F Output 32 points Y100 to Y11F Y180 to Y19F Y260 to Y27F Y340 to Y35F FPG XY64D2T 4 2 3 FP gt Positioning Unit numbers do not need to be set as 1 0 allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added The allocation of positioning units is determined by the installation location Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Ups ess unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 unit 4 1 axis type Input 16 points X100 to X10F X180 to X18F X260 to X26F X340 to X34F FPG PP11 FPG PP12 Output 32 points Y100 to Y10F Y180 to Y18F Y260 to Y26F Y340 to Y34F 2 axis type Input 32 points X100 to X11F X180 to X19F X260 to X27F X340 to X35F FPG PP21 FPG PP22 Output 32 points Y100 to Y11F Y180 to Y19F Y260 to Y27F Y340 to Y35F 4 8 FPS 4 2 Allocation for Units se Note The FP gt expansion unit next to the contr
62. Counter Function 7 3 4 3 Target Value Match ON Instruction F166 GVL The global variable list applies to the two following FPWIN Pro programming examples Class Identifier Mats IEC asan Type 1 Initial EZ VAR GLOBAL Outpute Q Programming example 1 FPWIN GR XA If the elapsed value DT90044 and DT90045 for PDF 166 KO K10090 Y7 channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns on FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier 1 Initial Comment Activates the function If the elapsed value for the channel set with Channel No matches the value set with HSC Output turns on Stat 466 18 C a Output HSC iuo Has M Programming example 2 FPWIN GR XB If the elapsed value DT90200 and DT90201 for HDF F166 HC1S K2 K20000 Y6 2 K20000 output Y6 turns on FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier Type Initial Comment e iBOOL TjFALSE Activates the function Start M i Channel No 7 16 FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function LD Body Iff the elapsed value for the channel set with Channel No matches the value set with HSC TargVal the coil Output amp turns 4 p EN Outputs ChannelNo n d gt HSC_Targvai
63. FPG COM1 2 channel RS232C type part no FPG COM2 For 1 N communication 1 channel RS485 type part no FPG COM3 FP 8 1 Communication Modes of the FP 8 1 2 General Purpose Serial Communication With general purpose serial communication see also chapter 10 data can be sent back and forth between an image processing device connected to the COM port and an external device such as a bar code reader A program in the FP is required to send and to receive data The data to be transmitted and the data received is stored in data registers specified by system register settings Image checker Data register DT Data transmission using uuu F159 MTRN E gt Data received in receive buffer Received data Data is sent to and received from external devices through the data registers FPX Applicable communication cassette For 1 1 communication 1 channel RS232C type part no FPG COM1 2 channel RS232C type part no FPG COM2 For 1 N communication 1 channel RS485 type part no FPG COM3 8 3 FP 8 1 Communication Modes of the FP 8 1 3 Link In a PLC link see also chapter 11 data is shared with all PLCs connected via MEWNET using dedicated internal relays called link relays L and data registers called link registers LD If the link relay contact for one PLC goes on the same link relay also goes on in each of the other PLCs connected to
64. FPX Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Receive area Receive area Receive area Send Receive area Receive Send FPX 11 1 Overview gt Wi Example Link relay LO for unit no 1 is turned on The status change is fed back to the programs of the other units and YO of the other units is set to TRUE A constant of 100 is written to link register LDO of unit no 1 The contents of LDO in the other units are also changed to a constant of 100 RS485 RO K100 LDO No 1 Link register LDO No 3 Link register No 4 Link LDO 100 No 2 Link register FP 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters By default the COM ports are disabled for communication Set the communication mode the unit number and the link area using the FPWIN Pro or FPWIN GR programming tool 0527 Note When using a PLC link the communication format and baud rate are fixed communication format data length char bit 38 bits parity odd stop bit 1 baud rate 115200 bps 11 2 1 Communication Mode Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 Options gt PLC Configuration PLC Configuration p08p FP Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold2 Action on Error Time Link High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port COMI Port
65. Interpolate15 DUT GLOBAL 3 VAR GLOBAL van GLOBAL 3Eimermistorinput i 730040 Jaws 90040 POU Header e E StadSCAL F282_SCAL E EN ENO 7 siThermistorInput x i i Te mp Output dut Measuredal Refer Points xy data fad aah I Sead 12 7 FP 12 3 Clock Calendar Function 12 3 Clock Calendar Function If a backup battery is installed in the FPX the clock calendar function can be used 12 3 4 Area for Clock Calendar Function With the clock calendar function data indicating the hour minute second day year and other information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and can be used in sequence programs Special data register no DT90053 Hour data Minute data Available Not available HOO to H23 to H59 DT90054 Minute data Second data Available Available to H59 HOO to H59 DT90055 Day data Hour data Available Available 1 to H31 to H23 DT90056 Year data Month data Available Available HOO to H99 H01 to H12 DT90057 Day of the week data Available Available to Upper byte Lower byte Reading Writing 12 8 FP 12 3 Clock Calendar Function 12 3 2 Setting of Clock Calendar Function 58 Notes e The clock calendar values are backed up using a battery Therefore they cannot be used unless a battery has been
66. Precision of calendar timer At 0 C 32 F less than 119 seconds error per month At 25 C 77 F less than 51 seconds error per month At 55 C 131 F less than 148 seconds error per month 4 An optional communication cassette RS232C type is required in order to use 1 1 communication Re send processing is recommended 5 An optional communication cassette RS485 type is required in order to use 1 communication Re send processing is recommended 6 An optional communication cassette RS485 type is required 7 The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration A 5 FPS A 2 Performance Specifications High speed counter pulse output PWM output specifications ene a See High speed counter Input point number Single phase max 4 channels Two phase max 2 channels Maximum counting speed Single phase for 1 channel max 50 kHz x 1 for 2 channels max 30 kHz x 2 for 3 or 4 channels max 20 kHz x 3 or 4 Two phase for 1 channel max 20 kHz x 1 for 2 channels max 15 kHz x 2 Input mode Single phase incremental decremental Two phase two phase incremental decremental incremental decremental control Input contact used see note1 Single phase count input CHO count input CH1 reset input CHO CH1 count input CH2 count input CH3 reset input CH2 CH3
67. RS PosOperDone bFromPatoP 1 Start dutDataTable1 bEmergencyStop ass position setting method 7 84 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function LD Body bPositionStart hi Flag RS_PosOperDone E wag WW FromP4toP 1Start bPosOperDone 27255 32 bFromP4toP 1 Start 0 1 dut DataTable bCircHnterpFlag gt gt N a yout bEmergencyStop gt wHSC Ch2 NoSoftR 7 85 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 6 2 Center Position Setting Method Using current position P as a reference designate target position E and center position Q which will be the reference point for drawing the circle and perform positioning control using circular interpolation In this program example start from current position P2 and using circle center position Q as a reference point perform control until target position P3 is reached CHO CW axis P2 10000 0 Q e 10000 5000 P3 10000 10000 Y axis CH2 CW axis Allocation Positioning start Always ON Control flag CHO Control flag CH2 Circular interpolation control flag Emergency stop switch From P2 to P3 start Positioning done Allocation of data registers Data number User setting DT60 to DT61 area Setting content Set values in sample program Control code Stop mode Absolute Center position setting method From
68. STX end codes CR CR LF None ETX Transmission speed Baud rate Max 99 units stations Number of units stations max 32 units stations when a C NET adapter is connected see notes 3 4 and 5 Interface Conforming to RS485 connection using terminal block 58 Notes 1 For 1 N serial communication the RS485 type communication cassette is required Additionally re send processing is recommended 2 Transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are specified in the system registers 3 Unit station numbers are specified in the system registers Up to 31 units stations can be specified using the switches on the control unit 8 7 FP 8 2 Device Description 4 When connecting a commercially available device having an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units stations transmission distance and transmission speed baud rate vary depending on the connected device 5 The values for transmission distance transmission speed baud rate and number of units stations should be within the ranges shown in the diagram below Transmission speed 115 2k bit s 99 Transmission speed 57 6k bit s 70 Number of units stations 40 0 700 1000 1200 Transmission distance m When using a transmission speed of 2 400 bit s to 38 4k bit s a maximum of 99 units stations and a maximum transmission di
69. SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs e Executing SYS1 does not change any of the system registers e The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs connected to the link e short waiting time has been set there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their power supply is on The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms 11 20 FP 11 5 PLC Link Response Time e lf there are any stations that have not been added to the link the setting should not be changed as long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problems 11 5 2 Error Detection Time for Transmission Assurance Relays If the power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off it takes as a default value 6 4 seconds for the transmission assurance relay of that PLC to be turned off at the other stations This time period can be shortened using the SYS1 instruction 4 7 Programming example Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PLC link transmission assurance is off from the default value of 6 4 s to 100 ms FPWIN GR SYS1 MPCLK1T1 100 Key words Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1T1 Permissible range for key word no 2 100 to 6400 100 ms to 6400 ms FPWIN Pro POU Header Since Matsushita addresses and strings are entered directly instead
70. Singapore Aromat Corporation Head Office USA 629 Central Avenue New Providence N J 07974 USA Tel 1 908 464 3550 Fax 1 908 464 8513 www aromat com Matsushita Electric Works Ltd China Office 2013 Beijing Fortune Building 5 Dong San Huan Bei Lu Chaoyang District Beijing China Tel 86 10 6590 8646 Fax 86 10 6590 8647 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Hong Kong Rm1601 16 F Tower 2 The Gateway 25 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2956 3118 Fax 852 2956 0398 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Automation Controls Group 1048 Kadoma Kadoma shi Osaka 571 8686 Japan Tel 06 6908 1050 Fax 06 6908 5781 www mew co jp e acg Matsushita Electric Works Asia Pacific Pte Ltd 101 Thomson Road 25 03 05 United Square Singapore 307591 Tel 65 6255 5473 Fax 65 6253 5689 COPYRIGHT 2003 All Rights Reserved Specifications are subject to change without notice Printed in Europe
71. Specifications 2 3 Output Specifications The FP is available as a transistor and as a relay output type Below you will find the specifications for both types 2 3 1 Transistor Output Specifications These output specifications apply to the C32 and C28 control units Description C32 NPN Insulation method Optical coupler C28 PNP Output type Open collector 5 to 24 V DC 4 75 to 26 4 V DC 24 V DC 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Max load current For YO Y1 Y4 0 3 For Y2 Y5 to YF For YO Y1 Y4 0 5 For Y2 Y5 to YB 0 3A Max surge current For YO Y1 Y4 0 9 For Y2 Y5 to YF 0 5A For YO Y1 Y3 Y4 1 5A For Y2 Y5 to YB 7 Output points per common 16 points common 12 points common OFF state leakage current 100 uA or less 0 5 V or less For YO Y1 Y3 Y4 at 15 mA or more 2 us or less For Y2 from Y5 0 2 ms or less For YO Y1 Y3 Y4 at 15 mA or more 8 us or less For Y2 from Y5 0 5 ms or less 21 6 to 26 4 V DC ON state voltage drop OFF gt gt ON Response time ON gt OFF External power supply for driving internal circuit Voltage Current 70 mA or less Zener diode LED display Thermal protection for Y2 from Y5 Surge absorber Operating mode indicator Phase fault protection Limitations on the number o
72. Two phase X1 count input CHO X2 reset input CHO X4 count input CH2 X5 reset input CH2 Output point number Two independent points simultaneous output possible Output mode CW and CCW mode pulse and direction mode Maximum output frequency 1 channel max 100 kHz x 1 2 channels max 60 kHz x 2 linear interpolation function max 100 kHz arc interpolation function max 20 kHz High speed counter used see note 2 Two phase CHO or CH2 Input Output contact used see note 1 X2 or X5 home input YO or Y3 CW output or pulse output 1 or 4 CCW output or direction output Y2 or Y5 deviation counter reset output Output point number Two points YO Y3 Output frequency 1 5 to 12 5k Hz at resolution of 1000 15 6k to 41 7k Hz at resolution of 100 Output duty 0 0 to 99 9 at resolution of 1000 1 to 99 at resolution of 100 High speed counter used see note 2 Two phase CHO or CH2 Output contact used see note 1 0527 Notes 1 The contacts noted above cannot be allocated for more than one function Also contacts that are not assigned to the various functions can be used as general inputs outputs Inputs to X5 are pulse catch inputs and can also be used for interrupt inputs 2 If using pulse output or PWM output one channel of the two phase high speed counter is used for each output point in each cas
73. Type and Type Il Type home return The home input is effective regardless of whether or not there is a near home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration has been completed Without near home input With near home input Home Near home Home Speed input on Speed input on input on Max speed Max speed Initial speed Initial speed Oz 2 Home input is effective at any time Home input ON during deceleration Near home Speed input on Home Max speed input on Initial speed OHz Type Il home return In this mode the home input is effective only after deceleration started by near home input has been completed Near home Home Speed input on input on Max speed Initial speed OHz Home input effective only after deceleration 7 34 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 1 Control code H constant 0 Fixed Number of acceleration deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps can only be specified for ver 2 0 or higher Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 60 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Operation mode and output type 20 Type home return CW 21 Type home return CCW 22 Type home return Direction output off 23 Type home return Direction output on 24 Typ
74. Windows software FPWIN Pro Ver 4 0 or higher or FPWIN GR Ver 2 0 or z higher FPWIN GR Ver 1x NPST GR and FP Programmer cannot be used Programming tool software Computer PC connection cable 2 PC connection cable Cable needed to connect the FPX and the computer Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 OS Operating Hard disk Product Type of software system capacity Part No No FPWINGRF EN2 AFPS10520 FPWIN GR Ver 2 software Windows 95 98 English language Upgrade to Me 2000 NT 30MB or more menu upgrade from Ver 4 0 or later FPWINGRR EN2 AFPS10520R Ver 1 1 Conforms IEC61131 3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 4 OS Operating Hard disk Type of software system capacity Part No English Bao language FPWINPROF EN4 AFPS50540 menu Windows 95 98 Me 2000 NT 2 FPWIN Pro Ver 4 Small type English Ver 4 0 or later for and language FPWINPROS EN4 AFPS51540 FP M menu for all type FP series PLC 1 8 Chapter 2 Parts and Specifications FP 2 1 Parts and Functions 2 1 Parts and Functions Front view 2 2 2 24 2 ofsot g ng Pa
75. Y axis CH2 component speed h DT519 Maximum speed Parameters igs axis component DT520 X axis CHO frequency range aS calculated due to DT521 Y axis CH2 frequency range instruction execution DT522 X axis CHO number of n are stored here acceleration deceleration steps DT523 Y axis CH2 number of 7 44 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 1 Control code H constant S 1 S H 0 Fixed LL Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 60 1 Duty 1 4 25 0 Fixed Position control mode and output method 00 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward off reverse on 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward off reverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Composite speed initial speed maximum speed Hz lt K constant gt 1 5Hz to 100kHz K1 to K100000 1 5Hz is for an angle of Odeg or 90deg only For 1 5 Hz specify K1 If the component speed drops lower than the minimum speed for each frequency range then the speed will become the corrected component speed so be careful See 6 When simultaneously using a high speed counter periodical interrupt or PLC link do not set to 60kHz or higher If the initial speed is set equal to the maximum speed pulses will be output with no acceleration deceleration Set the
76. a total check function to determine the location of the syntax error Refer to your software manual for details about the total check method Error code is 20 or higher Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error Procedure for FPWIN GR Click on the Clear Error button in the Status display dialog box Error code 43 and higher can be cleared In PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared 13 5 FP 13 2 Troubleshooting An error can also be cleared by executing the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Procedure for FPWIN Pro Select Monitor gt PLC Status select Clear In PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared An error can also be cleared by executing the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR 587 Notes e f the mode selector switch has been set to RUN the error is cleared and at the same time operation is enabled However if the problem that caused the error has not been eliminated it may look as though the error has not been cleared e When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is sto
77. also occurs if the same timer counter number is being used Change to PROG mode and correct the program so that one relay is not used for two or more OT and KP instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 only for FPWIN GR Not paired error For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is either missing or in an incorrect position Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions 4 see note Parameter mismatch error An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For example the number setting in a program does not agree with the timer counter range setting Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree E5 see note Program area error An instruction which must be written to a specific area main pro gram area or subprogram area has been written to a different area for example a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area E6 see note Compile memory full error The program stored the is too large to compile in the pro gram memory Change to PROG mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program E7 see note High level instruction type
78. any other input can be specified for the near home input specified for the near home input Single pulse input driver pulse input and direction input method One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output Set the control code for F171 SPDH to pulse and direction Up to two driver systems can be connected Using CHO Using CH2 FP gt gt X5 x3 Near home X6 input Driver input Driver Pulse output YO Pulse output put gt ya Direction Direction output output X3 or any other input can be X6 or any other desired input can be specified for the near home input specified for the near home input FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 3 Control Mode Incremental position control Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected mode Positive CW CCW Pulse output from CW Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON HSC counting method Incremental Negative Pulse output from CCW Pulse output when direction output is ON Absolute position control Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value Selected mode Ta
79. areas The link relays and link registers are transmitted from the send area to the receive area of a different The link relays and registers in the receive area on the receiving side must be within the same area as on the sending side Link relay allocation FPX FPX FPX FPX Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Receive area 3 Receive area Send area Receive area WLO Send area 19 20 Receive area 63 System Name Set value of various control units Tester Ho No 1 2 No 3 No 4 No 40 Range of link relays used for PLC link No 42 Start address of link relay send area No 43 Size of link relay send area Link register allocation FPX FPZ FPX FPX Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 LDO Send area Receive area 39 Receive area Send area i Receive area 40 Receive area 127 System register no No 41 Range of link registers used for PLC link Receive area Send area No 44 Start address of link register send area No 45 Size of link register send area When link areas are allocated as shown above the send area of unit no 1 can be transmitted to the receive areas of units no 2 3 and 4 Also the receive area of unit no 1 can receive data from the send areas of units no 2 and 3 Unit no 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from units no 1 2 and 3 but cannot send dat
80. as the send buffer DT When F159 MTRN is executed the data is output from the COM port Data register DT Data transmission using Data writing F159 MTRN The terminator specified in the system register is automatically added to the data that has been sent The maximum volume of data that can be sent is 2 048 bytes Device with RS232C port FPS 10 2 gt 10 1 Overview Receiving data Data received from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register and the reception done flag goes on Data can be received whenever the reception done flag is off Data register DT When data is being received the reception done flag is controlled by the F159 MTRN instruction Data receiving No terminator is included the stored data The maximum volume of data that can be received Device with is 4 096 bytes RS232C port Reception done flag on 10 1 2 Programming Example The F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified COM port F159 MTRN is only used with the FP It is an updated version of F144 TRNS and allows multiple communication ports to be accommodated 0 Note When programming with FPWIN Pro the F144 TRNS s n instruction is internally compiled on the FP to F159 MTRN s Start n Number d Port 1 On all other PLCs F159 MTRN is internally compiled to F144 T
81. bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D 32 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion Converts the 32 bit integer data with sign specified by 5 1 S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data to 16 bit integer conversion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D Floating point type data to 32 bit integer conver sion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data to 16 bit inte ger conversion rounding the first decimal point down to integer Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D Floating point type data to 32 bit inte ger conversion rounding the first decimal point down to integer Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding
82. constant System Change the setting value of the system register registers for the PLC link function No 40 to H 2 01 02 No 47 changing B 41 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions Data comparison instructions 16 bit data comparison Start Description Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data the comparative condition S1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data the comparative condition S2 16 bit data comparison AND Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data the comparative condition S1 S2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S14 S2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 512 S2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data the comparative condition S1 lt S
83. error In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered by one contact E g FO MV and PO PMV use the same trigger continuously Correct the program so that the high level instructions exe cuted in every scan and at the leading edge are triggered sep arately High level instruction operand com bination error se Note There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination of operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type Enter the correct combination of operands In FPWIN Pro these errors are detected by the compiler Therefore they are not critical B 35 FPS B 6 Table of Error Codes B 6 2 Self Diagnostic Error Codes User s ROM error Opera tion status Description and steps to take Probably a hardware problem Please contact your dealer Unit installation error The number of installed units exceeds the limit Turn off the power supply and check the restrictions on unit combinations System register error Probably an error in the system register Check the system register setting Interrupt error 0 Probably a hardware problem Please contact your dealer Interrupt error 1 An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to noise is possible Turn off the power and chec
84. error flag non hold Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs The ad dress where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs R9009 96 MX0 900 9 Carry flag This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation results and as a result of a shift system instruction being execut ed R900A 0 900 10 gt flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the comparison instructions R900B MX0 900 11 flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison instruc tions when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instruc tions R900C 0 900 12 lt flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller in the comparison instructions R900D 0 900 13 Auxiliary timer instruction flag Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in the timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM auxiliary timer instruction This flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off R900E 0 900 14 Tool port communication error Turns on when a communication error at the Tool port has oc curred R900F 0 900 15 Constant scan error flag Turns on when the scan time exceeds the time specified in system register 34 during constant scan execution This goes
85. flags R9038 R9048 on and off The received data is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register Data can be received when F159 MTRN turns the reception done flag off 10 1 3 Setting Communication Parameters By default the COM port is set to Computer link System register settings should be entered for operation mode communication format baud rate and receive buffer The settings are made using the FPWIN Pro or FPWIN GR programming tool FPS 10 1 Overview Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 Option gt PLC Configuration Configuration 08 Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold 2 Action Error Time Link High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port COMI Port COM2 Port No 410 Unit No 1 No 412 Comm Mode Modem Enabled No 413 Communication No 415_Baudrate Initial Char Bit e Bis Terminator CR bps miiie ere Parity Odd v Header STX not exist Help Stop Bit 1 Starting address for data received of z seei serial data communication mode J No 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received of 2048 10 20481 serial data communication mode Click COM 1 amp 2 Port tab There are separate settings for COM port 1 and 2 No 412 Communication mode Select the COM port operation mode click on z and select General Communication No 413 for COM 1 port No 414 for COM 2 port
86. gt gt gt Unit 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Computer C NET adapte RS232C pss The unit number for the PLC to which the command is being sent is included in the command message The unit number of the PLC sending a response is included in the response message Se Note If the FPS is used with a communication cassette 1 channel RS485 type no C NET adapter is necessary on the PLC side Communication Cassette The following communication cassette can be used for 1 N computer link communication Name Description Part no This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FPX communication cassette two wire RS485 port It supports 1 N computer links C 1 channel RS485 type NET general purpose serial communication and a PLC link 9 14 FP 9 3 1 N Communication 9 3 1 Setting System Registers and Unit Numbers System registers For 1 N communication using a computer link the system registers should be set as shown below Set value COM port 1 unit number 1 to 99 Set the desired unit number COM port 1 selection of communication mode Computer Link Communication format for COM port 1 Data length 8 bits Parity check Odd Header STX not exist Baud rate setting for COM port 1 9600 bps The communication format and baud rat
87. in the specifications table see page 7 4 the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the channel number being used The output turned on and off can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired with the instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R Using CHO with incremental input and reset input t input Count inpu Reset input eset inpu xo On and off output Yn gt The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired Using CHO with two phase input and reset input FP X Aph input phase inpu xd X1 2 phase input oa Reset input On and off output Yn LL The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function 7 3 4 Instructions The following instructions can be used with the high speed counter function 7 3 4 1 High Speed Counter Control Instruction FO This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction Counter software reset Counting operation enable disable Hardware reset enable disable
88. initial speed is corrected to 1 5Hz and range 0 is selected If initial speed 2 1 5Hz range 0 is selected b 9800Hz lt maximum speed 100000Hz If initial speed 48 2 initial speed is corrected to 48Hz and range 0 is selected If 48Hz s initial speed lt 191Hz range 1 is selected If initial speed 2 191Hz range 2 is selected 7 Number of acceleration deceleration steps The system automatically calculates the number of acceleration deceleration steps in the range 0 to 60 steps If the operation result is O pulses are output for the initial speed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration The number of acceleration deceleration steps is found using the following formula acceleration deceleration time ms x component initial speed Hz Example With incremental position control mode initial speed 300Hz maximum speed 5kHz acceleration deceleration time 0 5s CHO target value 1000 CH2 target value 50 CHO component initial speed 300 x1000 999 626Hz 10002 502 CH2 component initial speed 300x 50 14 981Hz 10002 502 CHO number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 3 x 299 626 147 8 60 steps CH2 number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 3 x 14 981 7 4 7 steps FPWIN GR R11 HDF F1 DMV H1000 DT500 F1 DMV K500 DT502 F1 DMV K5000 DT504 F1 DMV K5000 DT508 F1 DMV K2000 DT510 C L3 L3 uL uL F1 DMV K300 07506
89. no 4 or 12 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90236 9e MW5 90236 DT90237 96 MW5 90237 DT90238 96 MW5 90238 DT90239 96e MW5 90239 PLC link unit station System regis ter 40 and 41 no 5 or 13 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings pertaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example When DT90219 is 0 Higher byte Lower byte DT90220 to T T DT90223 1 1 Unit station no 1 Setting contents of system register 40 42 44 and 46 Setting contents of system register 41 43 45 and 47 A N A B 33 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC Name Name A Available N A Not available Description Reading Writing DT90240 PLC link MW5 90240 unit station no 6 or 14 DT90241 96MW5 90241 DT90242 9e MW5 90242 DT90243 96 MW5 90243 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90244 PLC link 96MW5 90244 unit station no 7 or 15 DT90245 96MW5 90245 DT90246 9e MW5 90246 DT90247 96 MW5 90247 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis t
90. number computer link 9 15 PLC link 11 5 Unit number setting switch 2 4 computer link 9 16 PLC link 11 7 Unit types 1 5 W Watchdog timer 13 7 Weight A 2 Wiring communication cassette 8 11 input 6 7 MIL connector 6 12 output 6 10 power supply 6 4 terminal block 6 14 FPS Index Record of Changes Manual No ARCT1F333E ACG MS333E ARCT1F333V1 0END 1 1 ACG MS333E 1 ARCT1F333V2 0END ARCT1F333V2 1END 1 2 ACG M333E 2 ARCT1F333V3 0END Date Sept 2001 Dec 2001 Feb 2002 April 2002 July 2002 Nov 2002 May 2003 Description of changes First edition European edition addition of FPWIN Pro examples and procedures 2nd edition Additions Control units FPG C32T2 FPG C24R2 Expansion unit FPG XY64D2T Tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 4 FPWIN Pro examples added for instructions F174 F175 F176 Correction of errors programming example Reading elapsed value F1 pp 7 15 7 54 programming examples F166 and F167 pp 7 16 ff programming example Double Speed Inverter GVL p 7 22 description F171 deviation counter clear signal p 7 34 F173 PWM output function note on out of range duty area p 7 74 programming example F159 body p 10 14 flag number R9049 changed to R9048 p 10 35 command name SYS2 ch
91. of units with a thermistor input function 2 4 FP 2 1 Parts and Functions 2 1 1 Tool Port Specifications A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit Pinno Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction Signal Ground Transmitted Data Unit External device Received Data Unit External device Not used mE 5V Unit gt External device The factory settings are shown below They can be changed in the system registers Baudrate 9600 bit s Character bit 8 bit Parity check Odd parity Stop bit length 1 bit 2 1 2 Communication Cassette For the detachable communication cassette optional there are three different types available Type Applicable communication Terminal layout diagram function 1 channel Computer link General purpose serial communication Ss SD Transmitted Data Output RD Received Data Input 29999 RS Request to Send Output CS Clear to Send Input SG Signal Ground SD RD RS CS SG 2 channel Computer link 5232C General purpose serial ype communication 224 RS2320 Fh ER S 1 Transmitted Data Output COM 1 R1 Received Data Input COM 1 S2 Transmitted Data Output COM 2 R2 Received Data Input COM 2 61 Ri 2 p SG SG Signal Ground COM 1 and 2 1 channel
92. pibe speed Pass position setting method Absolute F1 2000 DT 1004 Ps X axis Target position F1 DMV 1006 Ps Y axis Target position ch2 F1 DMV 1500 DT 1008 Se X axis Pass position cho DMV K 250 DT 1010 R12 S2 Y axis Pass position ch2 Data setting from to P4 1 F 10010 DT 1000 Control code Composite speed 1000Hz Target position 2000 0 Pass position S2 1500 250 LILI LILI LILI Data setting for the control from P3 to P4 Continue mode from CH2 CW to CHO CW Q 5 a a direction F1 1000 DT 1002 Pass position setting method Composite speed Absolute Composite speed 1000Hz Target position P4 3000 0 Pass position S3 2500 250 F1 3000 DT 1004 Pa X axis Target position DMV DT 1006 P4 Y axis Target position ch2 F1 DMV 2500 DT 1008 X axis Pass position chO F1 DMV K250 DT 1010 R13 Ss Y axis Pass position ch2 Mode changing for stoppage 1 Fi DMV H10 DT1000 3l Stop mode Data table R1 or E Control flag Mode changing for stoppage Positioning Mode changing for stoppage Control code Stop mode Positioning done Circular interpolation start Positioning Positioning done running 1 F176 SPCH DT1000 1 D
93. rail attachment lever 2 Pull attachment lever downwards 3 Liftup unit and re move from rail 5 8 FP 5 4 Installation Using Slim 30 Type Mounting Plate When using an expansion unit tighten the screws after joining all of the slim 30 type mounting plates to be connected Tighten all corner screws M Example Installation using two expansion units 30 0 mm 1 18 in 60 0 mm 2 36 in e 5 9 FP 5 5 Backup Battery 5 5 Backup Battery This section covers installation and lifetime of the backup battery as well as the setting of the battery alarm error function 58 Notes e If system register no 4 Battery error indication Alarm Battery Error in FPWIN GR is set to ON special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops and the ERROR ALARM LED will flash The battery remains effective for about a week after the alarm is issued but in some cases the problem is not detected immediately The battery should be replaced as soon as possible without turning off the power supply e When replacing the battery connect the new battery within 20 seconds of removing the old one 5 5 1 Installation If a backup battery is installed in the FPX clock calendar functions can be used and data registers or other data can be backed up Procedure 1 Using a screwdriver or similar tool open battery cover 2 Con
94. same manner 3 4 FP 3 4 Parts and Functions of FPX Expansion Unit 3 4 Parts and Functions of FP Expansion Unit FPG XY64D2T Input 32 points transistor output 32 points Front view 9 e d E 2 9 Left side view Right side view 6 HHHH 8 f DIN standard rail attachment 1 LED display selection switch Switches between the LED display of the 32 input points and the LED display of the 32 output points 2 Input connector 40 pins 3 Output connector 40 pins 4 Input and output indicator LEDs 5 FP expansion connector Used to connect the unit to the control unit or another expansion unit 6 Expansion hook Used to secure the expansion unit The hook is also used for installation on the FPO flat type mounting plate part no AFPO804 2 DIN rail attachment lever Used for easy attachment to a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on the FPO slim 30 type mounting plate part no AFP0811 3 5 FP 3 5 Specifications of FPX Expansion Unit 3 5 Specifications of FPx Expansion Unit Input specifications or EM DOCU Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated input current
95. stands for Data Unit Type and GVL for Global Variable List These and other terms are explained in the FPWIN Pro online help and reference manual vi FP FPO Program Compatibility FPO Program Compatibility If you are using FPO programs on the please note the following e Pulse output function The following changes have been made to instructions concerning pulse output Automatic trapezoidal ac F168 SPD1 F171 SPDH celeration deceleration con trol JOG operation F169 PLS F172 PLSH Data table control None F174 SPOH Linear interpolation control None F175 SPSH see note Circular interpolation con None F176 SPCH trol see note PWM output F170 PWM F173 PWMH se Note Linear and circular interpolation control is not available with the 2 and C32TTM FP control units e Serial data communication function The following changes have been made to instructions concerning serial data communication Faz TANS FET 587 Note When using FPWIN Pro with the FP the F144 TRNS instruction will automatically be translated into the F159 MTRN instruction and COM port 1 will be set With other PLCs F159 MTRN will automatically be translated into F144 TRNS In FPWIN GR F144 TRNS cannot be used with the FP vii FPO Program Compatibility FP Important Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual Whenever the warning triangle
96. the E terminal line and the E terminal Programs e Unit no 1 When X1 is input LO of the link relay goes on and when X2 is input L1 of the link relay goes on FPZ control unit no 2 begins operation X2 con control unit no 3 begins operation e Unit no 2 When LO of the link relay goes on YO is output 5 H YO output m e Unit 3 When L1 of the link relay goes on Y1 is output se Note If you are using FPWIN Pro and wish to use the addresses LD or LE please enter LOD or LOE to avoid error messages during compilation The errors arise due to hexadecimal conflicts with the commands Load LD or Less Than or Equal To LE 11 17 FPX 11 5 PLC Link Response Time 11 5 PLC Link Response Time The maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle can be calculated using the following formula T max Ts1 2 Tsn Iso ____ link addition processing time D Ts transmission time per station Tso master station scan time link table sending time The various items in the formula are calculated as described below 1 Ts transmission time per station Ts scan time Tpc PLC link sending time Tpc Ttx sending time per byte x PLC link sending size Ttx 1 transmission speed x 1000 x 11 ms approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps
97. the elapsed value areas DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to Y1 is used implicitly by F171 SPDH OV 24 V DC Home return start O Pulse output CW Home input Pulse output CC j Motor driver side side Motor C_I min unu Home sensor Near home sensor Pulse output diagram Near home sensor Home sensor XA on on X2 on 7 72 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN GR XA R903A R42 R40 Positioning operation running R40 ec R40 R41 HF 1 Positioning operation start R41 Positioning data table DT202 DT204 F DMV K150 DT206 BT209 Deviation counter clear output Not used Fi DT208 Control code H11 21 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Home return CCW F171 SPDH 200 T The data table headed by DT200 is used R903A R40 TO R42 Pulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by DT200 is used and pulses are output from CHO Positioning done pulse 1 s TMX 0 K 10 0 1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1 second timer JEL HDF Fo mv H10 DT 90052 Fo mv Ho DT 90052 Near home deceleration start 7 73 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro The GVL and DUT shown on page 7 62 apply to this program POU Header i Initial S
98. the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D 1 D B 57 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions Floating point type data to 16 bit integer conversion rounding the first decimal point off to integer Boolean Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in Operand Description Floating point type data to 32 bit integer conversion rounding the first decimal point off to integer Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data rounding the first decimal point down The decimal part of the real number data specified in S 1 S is rounded down and the result is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data rounding the first decimal point off The decimal part of the real number data stored in S 1 S is rounded off and the result is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data sign changes The real number data stored in S 1 S is changed the sign and the result is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data absolute Takes the absolute value of real number data specified by S 1 S and the result absolute value is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data degre
99. the network Likewise if the contents of a link register are rewritten in one PLC the change is made in the same link register of each of the other PLCs connected to the network The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network such as target production values and type codes can easily be implemented to coordinate the data and the data of all units are updated at the same time Link relay In the figure below when link relay LO of the master station no 1 turns on this signal is converted by the programs of the other stations and YO of the other stations is activated Link register In the figure below if a constant of 100 is written to LDO of the master station no 1 the contents of LDO in the other stations are also changed to a constant of 100 RS485 No 2 Link register LDO No Link register LDO 100 No 4 Link register LDO 100 RO _ Fo MV K100 LDO No 1 Link register 3 LDO 100 Applicable communication cassette For 1 N communication 1 channel RS485 type part no FPG COM3 8 4 FP 8 2 Device Description 8 2 Device Description This section describes the different cassette
100. the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two receiving opera tions value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two receiving opera tions value in the register x 2 5ms The number of times the sending operation is per formed The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two sending opera tions value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two sending opera tions value in the register x 2 5ms DT90148 to DT90155 96 MW5 90148 to MW5 90155 Not used DT90156 5 90156 DT90157 5 90157 MEWNET WO PLC link status Area used for measurement of receiving interval Area used for measurement of sending interval DT90158 9e MW5 90158 DT90159 9e MW5 90159 Not used DT90160 9e MW5 90160 MEWNET WO PLC link unit no Stores the unit no of PLC link DT90161 96 MW5 90161 MEWNET WO PLC link error flag Stores the error contents of PLC link B 30 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC Name A Available N A Not available Description Reading Writing DT90162 to DT90169 5 90162 to 5 90169 0790170 5 90170 DT90171 5 90171 DT90172 5 90172 DT90173 5 90173 0790174 5 90174 0790175 5 90175 DT90176 5 90176 DT901
101. this program example start from the current position P4 and then perform control until the target position P1 is reached via passing position S X axis CHO CW axis S 5000 5000 P4 0 10000 Y axis CH2 CW axis Allocation Positioning start Always ON Emergency stop switch Control flag CHO From P4 to P1 start Control flag CH2 Positioning done Circular interpolation control flag Allocation of data registers item Data number Setting content Set values in sample program User setting DT40 to DT41 Control code Stop mode Absolute Pass position setting method area From CHO CW to CH2 CW direction DT42 to DT43 Composite speed 2000Hz DT44 to DT45 Target position X axis Target position P1 X axis 0 DT46 to DT47 Target position Y axis Target position P1 Y axis 0 DT48 to DT49 Pass position X axis Pass position S X axis 5000 DT50 to DT51 Pass position Y axis Pass position S Y axis 5000 Work area DT52 to DT57 Operation result storage Parameters calculated due to instruction execution area are stored 7 82 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function Sample program Key Points Designate the control code rotation direction with from CHO CW direction to CH2 OW direction Use the circular interpolation control flag R904E to verify completion of the circular interpolation action FPWIN GR R9010 F1
102. type of command processed th mman e command If the command was used to read data the data that was read v If an error occurred and the com mand could not be processed suc cessfully the content of the error The command and data are sent to the PLC with the v specified unit number A response is returned and pro cessed by the computer e g the computer retrieves the data that was sent 9 1 2 Format of Command and Response Command message All command related items should be noted in the text segment The unit number must be specified before sending the command 1 Header 2 Unit no of destination 01 to 99 decimal 8 Text Content depends on type of command 4 Check code BCC hexadecimal EN 7 Terminator Two One digit digit EE 2 Target that reads the value internal relay R1 Specified item S specifies that only 1 point should be read Command name e g read contact area Command code Indicates that this is a command 9 3 FP 9 1 Overview 7 Header start code Commands must always have a ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code H3C at the beginning of a message 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified In 1 1 communication the unit number 01 should be specified 3 Text The content differs depending on the command The content should be noted
103. used as the receive buffer received data will be stored in the registers starting from DT201 in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte DT203 DT202 DT201 Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 10 33 FP 10 5 1 N Communication 10 5 1 N Communication The FPX and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable Using the protocol that matches the external units the F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data Data register DT gt Transmitted data Received data FPX Data transmission using F159 MTRN Data is received into receive buffer Data is sent and received through the data registers Communication cassette The following communication cassette can be used with 1 N general purpose serial communication This communication cassette is a 1 unit with a FPX communication cassette two wire RS485 port It supports 1 N computer links C 1 channel RS485 type NET general purpose serial communication and PLC link FPG COMS3 System Register Settings For 1 N general purpose serial communication the system registers should be set as shown below e Settings for COM port 1 Set value No 410 Unit no 1 to 32 Set the desired unit no Communication mode for COM port 1 General purpose serial
104. using the F159 MTRN in struction R9048 96 MX0 904 8 COM port 2 reception done flag during gen eral purpose commu nication Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication R9049 96 MX0 904 9 COM port 2 transmis sion done flag during general purpose communica tion Goes on when transmission has been completed in general purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose communica tion R904A to R904D 0 904 10 to 0 904 13 Not used R904E 0 904 14 Circular interpolation control in progress flag This flag is set when circular interpolation instruction F176 is run This state is maintained until the target value is achieved While this flag is set other positioning instructions F171 to F176 cannot be run R904F MX0 904 15 Circular interpolation data overwrite con firmation flag This flag is set when circular interpolation instruction F176 is run It is cleared when the instruction at the same address is run This is used to overwrite data in continuous mode where circular interpola tion is conducted continuously R9050 MX0 905 0 MEWNET WO PLC link transmission error flag When using MEWNET WO turns on when a transmission error occurs in a PLC link turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area settings R9051 to R905F 96 MX0 905 1 to 0 905
105. value vo Thermistor 0 DT90040 KO to K1000 Thermistor 1 DT90041 Thermistor Measurement Temperature A D Conversion Table Example with 3450 K Calculate the relationship between temperature and thermistor resistance using a table with the temperature characteristics of your thermistor Use the formula on the preceding page to calculate the post conversion digital value Thermistor resistance KO Converted digital value Resolution C 30 0000 19 4900 12 9700 8 8280 6 1400 4 3560 3 1470 2 3170 1 7340 1 3180 1 0170 0 7940 0 6277 0 5017 0 4052 0 3305 The digital values in the table above do not include overall precision of microcomputer s built in AD converter 5 LSB thermistor accuracy Conversion program using scaling instruction F282 You can run the scaling instruction F282 to create appropriate interpolated data from non linear data as a table of converted digital data and temperatures FPWIN GR DT90040 Special data register __ F282 DT90040 DT100 Digital data converted from thermistor input DTO Head of data table DT100 Converted data temperature 12 6 FP 12 2 Thermistor Input Functions Data table example Input data Output data converted digital data temperature Y Temperature X A D value DTO specifies the number of data pairs 1 FPWIN Pro DUT
106. van GLOBAL 3 bPositionstat xe 19041 1800 F raLse i VAR GLOBAL 4 iShiftRegister 2 J o 7 93 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function POU Header VAR EXTERP 4ibHSC_Ch2_FI VAR EXTERP 4 bCirclInterpFla RS_PosOperDone i bPosOperDone Hi bFromP toP2Start Hi bFromP2toP3Start bFromP3toP4 Start dutDataTable3 ULSE_ARC_PASS Control Code 0 i Initial Speed 2000 i MaximumSpeed 2000 iTargetValue 10000 Control Code 1681010 i Speed 2000 iTargetPos X 0 iTargetPos Y 0 i Speed 2000 iTargetPos X 10000 iTargetPos Y 10000 iCenterPos X 10000 CenterPos Y 5000 i Control Code 0 i Initial Speed 2000 i MaximumSpeed 2000 iTargetValue_X TargetValue Y 1580 Absolute mode P1 P2 1581010 Stop mode Pass position setting method From CHO CWto CH2 CW dir t Absolute CW CCW 1621110 Stop mode Center position setting method iFrom CHO CWto CH2 CW dir i Absolute CW CCW 1680 Absolute mode iP3 P4 7 94 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function LD Body bPositionStart bHSC Flag Spp 59 1 42245 RS_PosOperDone bHSC Ch2 Flag bCirctinterpFlag FromP 1toP2Start bHSC bFromP1toP2Start gt LE ni
107. wiring 6 10 FPS Index P Parts description 2 2 Password function 13 10 PC link See PLC link Photoelectric sensor 6 7 PLC link 8 4 11 2 connection example 11 15 monitoring 11 14 operation mode relay 11 14 largest station number 11 13 PLC link transmission error relay 11 14 response time 11 18 specifications 8 9 A 8 SYS instructions 11 20 system register settings 11 4 transmission assurance relay 11 14 11 21 transmission cycle time 11 18 11 20 Positioning programming examples 7 19 Positioning control instruction F171 home return 7 33 trapezoidal control 7 30 F174 7 40 Potentiometer 12 2 Power failures 6 2 Power supply 6 3 wiring 6 4 Programming tools 1 8 Protect error 13 10 Proximity sensor 6 7 Pulse output control modes 7 29 Pulse output function 7 2 7 26 F0 7 57 specifications 7 5 A 6 Pulse output instruction F172 7 37 F175 7 44 F176 7 48 Pulse output methods 7 27 Pulse direction output method 7 27 PWM output function 7 2 7 102 minimum input pulse width 7 10 specifications 7 5 A 6 PWM output instruction F173 7 102 R Receive buffer general purpose serial communication 10 7 10 32 Reception done flag 10 35 Reed switch 6 8 Relay output specifications 2 10 Relays B 3 Response message computer link 9 4 Response time PLC li
108. 00 DDT90258 MD5 90000 05 90258 Data memory for storing specific data Various settings and error codes are stored 7 double words Index register Decimal constants DIO DIC MD6 0 MD6 13 Can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier Range available for use Matsushita K 32768 to K32767 for 16 bit operation IEC 32768 to 32767 for 16 bit operation integer type 2147483648 to K2147483647 for 32 bit operation 2147483648 to 2147483647 for 32 bit operation Hexadecimal 16 0 to 16 FFFF for 16 bit operation constants HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation HO to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation 16 0 to 16 FFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation Constant Decimal constants 1 17549410E 38to 3 402823E38 monorefined real number F 1 175494x 10 38 to F 3 402823 x 1038 1 175494 10 38 to F3 402823 x 1038 1 17549410E 38to 3 402823E38 se Notes 1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration 2 If no battery is used only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R900 to R97F data registers DT32710 to DT32764 When the optional battery is used data can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the syst
109. 000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0111 NOoOuBRWN O 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0000 1010 0000 0000 0000 1011 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 0000 0000 1101 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0000 0000 0001 0010 0000 0000 0001 0011 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0001 0101 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0000 0000 0001 0010 0000 0000 0001 0011 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0001 0101 0000 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 0001 0111 0000 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 0001 0111 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0010 0001 0000 0000 0010 0010 0000 0000 0010 0011 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0001 1010 0000 0000 0001 1011 0000 0000 0001 1100 0000 0000 0001 1101 0000 0000 0001 1110 0000 0000 0001 1111 0000 0000 0010 0100 0000 0000 0010 0101 0000 0000 0010 0110 0000 0000 0010 0111 0000 0000 0010 1000 0000 0000 0010 1001 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0011 0001 0000 0000 0011 1111 0000 0000 1111 1111 0010 0111 0000 1111 0000 0000 0110 0011 0000 0010 0101 0101 1001 1001 1001 1001 B 61 FPS B 10 ASCII Codes B 10 ASCII Codes b7 be 0 bs 0 ASCII HEX code 0 o NUL 1 SOH o 1 0 2
110. 1 FPG C32T C32TTM WX0 WX31 IW0 IW31 External input relay 74 words see note 1 FPG C32T2 C32T2TM FPG C24R2 C24R2TM FPG C28P2 WX0 WX73 IW0 IW73 Code for specifying 16 external input points as one word 16 bits of data External output relay 32 words see note 1 FPG C32T C32TTM External output relay 74 words see note 1 FPG C32T2 C32T2TM FPG C24R2 C24R2TM FPG C28P2 Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay 98 words see note 2 WRO WR97 0 0 0 97 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data Link relay 64 words WLO WL63 7 0 7 63 Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one word 16 bits of data B 3 FPS B 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Memory area words Data register see note 2 Number of points 32765 words Memory area available for use Matsushita DTO DT32764 IEC 5 0 MW5 32764 Function Data memory used ina program Data is handled in 16 bit units one word Link data register see note 2 128 words LDO LD127 8 0 MW8 127 A shared data memory which is used within the PLC link Data is handled in 16 bit units one word Timer counter set value area see note 2 1024 words SV0 SV1023 MW3 0 MWS3 1023 Data memory for storing a t
111. 1 Chapter 13 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 13 1 SelfDiagnostic s sucede Rc om e CI Rc Ree 13 2 13 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition 13 2 1912 Operasion MN EN ied Ras oye 13 2 132 Troubleshooting 13 4 13 2 1 ERROR ALARM LED is Flashing 13 4 13 2 2 ERROR ALARM LED is OM 13 7 1323 All LEDS are OFF 2 2 4 5 13 7 13 2 4 Diagnosing Output 13 8 13 2 5 A Protect Error Message Appears 13 10 13 2 6 PROG Mode does not Change to 13 11 13 2 7 Transmission Error has Occurred 13 11 xiv FPX Table of Contents AppendixA Specifications Dimensions AT General Speciicatigng oes nah ope A 2 A2 Performance Specifications A 4 AS Dimensione URSUS A 9 Pcr A 9 Boe Expand 10 Appendix Programming Information EI General ME B 2 B 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constants B 3 BS Spesa B 6 3 1 Precautions When Setting System Registers B 6 B 3 2 Types of System Registers B 6 B 3 8 Checking and Changing System Registe
112. 1 second 0 1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1 second timer TMX 0 K10 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro The GVL and DUT shown on page 7 62 apply to this program POU Header EXTERNAL 4 vAR EXTERNAL ontrol Code 1681100 ontrol code 16 1100 i Initial Speed 500 25 duty i MaximumSpeed 5000 48 Hz to 100 kHz Accel Time 200 Incremental Cw CCW iss Hier ahs eke 7 RSoRosOperdone PosOper Stat gt HSC_ CHO Flag Pos Oper Dome USE Pos_Progress Pos Progress gt P DataTable1 Control Code TP PosOperDone Pos Progress HSC_ CHO Flag ies SML quee 3 p Pos perDone T40 5s 7 65 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 5 2 Incremental Position Control Operation Minus Direction When X9 PosStartMinus turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 PulseOutCCW of the specified channel CHO Y1 is used implicitly by F171_SPDH 0 V 24 V DO gt i Pulse output CCW Motor driver Pulse output CW side 8000 pulses Pulse output diagram 6 000 Hz 8 000 pulses 1 000 Hz 0 Hz 1 1 lt gt gt 300 ms 300 ms 7 66 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN GR x9 R903A R22 R20 HDF R20 Positioning operati
113. 15 Not used B 17 FPS B 4 of Special Internal Relays Relay No Matsushita IEC R9060 96 MX0 906 0 R9061 96 MX0 906 1 R9062 96 MX0 906 2 R9063 96 MX0 906 3 R9064 96 MX0 906 4 R9065 96 MX0 906 5 R9066 96 MX0 906 6 R9067 96 MX0 906 7 R9068 96 MX0 906 8 R9069 MX0 906 9 R906A 0 906 10 R906B MX0 906 11 R906C 0 906 12 R906D 0 906 13 R906E 0 906 14 R906F 0 906 15 MEWNET WO PLC link transmission assurance relay Unit no Description Turns on when unit no 1 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Turns on when unit no 2 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Unit no Turns on when unit no 3 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Unit no Turns on when unit no 4 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Turns on when unit no 5 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Unit no Turns on when unit no 6 is communicating properly in PLC lin
114. 1A grammer AFP1112A AFP1111 AFP1112 Programming Tools FP Upgrading FPWIN GR FPWIN GR version 2 1 or later is required to program the FP If you own FPWIN GR Ver 1 you will need to purchase the FPWIN GR Ver 2 upgrade separately To upgrade from FPWIN GR Ver 2 0 to Ver 2 1 please use the download service at our dedicated programmable logic controller site http www naisplc com Programming Conventions The explanations in this manual often utilize FPWIN GR conventions When using FPWIN Pro for programming please note theses slight differences e Instead of addresses variable names are used e Hexadecimal values are represented by the prefix 16 and not H e Decimal values do not require a K prefix e Inputs and outputs are labeled slightly differently e g s Start instead of S for F159 The FPWIN Pro examples in this manual were designed to parallel the FPWIN GR examples and may thus not be as sophisticated as they could be Please refer to the online help and programming manuals for examples and explanations tailored to FPWIN Pro The sample programs were written in Ladder Diagram In FPWIN Pro you can also program in Structured Text Function Block Diagram Instruction List and Sequential Function Chart Turn to the online help and the programming manual for examples in other programming languages The abbreviation POU used in the examples means Program Organization Unit DUT
115. 2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 52 16 bit data comparison Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 52 OR Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1z S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data the comparative condition S12 S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1z S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1z S2 B 42 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions 32 bit data comparison Start Description Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 52 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 51 1 S1 S241 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt 52 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 S241 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparativ
116. 25 duty iTargetValue1 1000 2 191 Hzto 100 kHz i Frequency2 2500 10 Incremental position control i TargetValue2 2000 20 CW incremental counting i Frequency 5000 i TargetValue3 5000 i i Frequency4 1000 f iTargetValue4 2000 i Termination 0 f gt Motor Switch gt DataTable4 Control Code 7 43 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 4 5 Pulse Output Instruction F175 Linear Interpolation The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table Positioning data table acceleration deceleration steps Positioning path Y axis CH2 2000 5000 X axis CHO Ee Control code 1 lees Composite speed Initial speed Hz 2 pro Composite speed Maximum speed Hz 2 Setting area DT505 DT506 2s Designated with DT507 Acceleration Deceleration time ms 3 user program ue Target value X axis CHO pulses 4 Target value Y axis CH2 pulses 4 DT512 X axis CHO component speed DT513 Initial speed DT514 X axis CHO component speed DT515 Maximum speed H DT516 Y axis CH2 component speed Si Operation result DT517 Initial speed storage area DT518
117. 3 Choose Yes in the confirmation dialog box Insurance and Security To prevent the accidental loss of programs consider the following measures e Backing up projects Back up your projects using the backup or the export function of the tool software and store the file in a separate location For further security you can also print out the entire program documentation e Specifying a password A password can prevent a program from being accidentally overwritten However if you forget your password it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to Deleting the password in the software will delete the program Therefore you should always note your password and keep it in a safe place gt Programming Tools Programming Tools Programming tool availability by unit type Unit Type FPG C32T2 FPG C28P2 Programming Tool FPG C32T Other Requirements FPG C32TTM FPO Cerne FPG C32T2TM FPG C24R2TM FPWIN Pro Ver 4 YES Version 4 02 or later is required if IEC61131 3 compliant software Ver 4 01 and later used in conjunction with the FP for Windows WE positioning unit YES Version 2 13 or later is required if FPWIN GR Ver 2 used in conjunction with the FP Ver2 tand later positioning unit Software for Windows FPWIN GR Ver 1 NO Software for NPST GR Ver 4 Ne un NPST GR Ver 3 AFP1113V2 AFP1114V2 AFP1113 programming AFP1114 unit FP pro AFp411
118. 4 1 General FP expansion unit side 4 Control unit gt FPO expansion unit side xor XeF Xo Nor XT XF al al a ali on ea oO g g gi tl s B H H H 30 30 B B B Bio 40 40 40 4 H H H a 55 59 so 59 Hu s Hu s HH 8 1 GE 8 S ni B B oo oo oo oo oo oo n E ess EEN CA EEN 0 9 00 E Bi ajos oll oo soli Bl LJ bo 30 H H H H H He oO He 2 Olle He S Bl Bl ol DO oO oO oO ol ED B Bl Bl B ra ra Fa ral We Er EE O _ver Yor Yor KE B O uu i uso H Bl H H H 30 H 30 H B B E 2B 2B B H 5 B
119. 41 1 0 1 D zone control When 63 1 S3 0 0 0 0 gt D 1 D When S341 S3 0 0 S341 S3 52 1 S2 0 1 D Process control instruction PID processing PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by S to S 2 and S44 to S410 and the result is stored in the S43 Data compare instructions 16 bit data If the data in the 16 bit area specified by S has revision changed since the previous execution internal relay detection R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution 32 bit data If the data in the 32 bit area specified by S 1 S has revision changed since the previous execution internal relay detection R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous exe cution B 59 FPS B MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 8 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Read contact area Reads the on and off status of contacts Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Write contact area Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area Reads the contents of a data area Write data area Writes data to a data area Read timer counter set value area Reads the value se
120. 50 HDF Positioning operation running R50 R50 R51 HoF Positioning operation start R51 Positioning data table DT202 204 K100 Dr206 B08 evan counter cer ouput Fi Dmv Ko DT208 Control code H11 20 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Home return CW F171 SPDH 200 The data table headed by DT200 is used R903A R50 TO R52 Pulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by DT200 is used and pulses are output from CHO Positioning done pulse 1 s TMX 0 K10 0 1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1 second timer JEL DF Fo mv H10 DT 90052 Fo mv Ho DT 90052 Near home deceleration start 7 76 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro The GVL and DUT shown on page 7 62 apply to this program POU Header i Home sensor input Hear home sensor input Control Code 1681120 i Control code 1641120 i i i Initial Speed 120 11 25 duty i iMaximumSpeed 1000 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz i i i AccelTime 100 120 Home return CW i iTargetVal 0 3j art Operation arts preset operation 5 Pos perDone P PosOperDone mrg RS PosOperDone ui Pos Oper Start Pos_Progress ee ee ZEE Pos_ Progress DataTable1 Control Code o PosOperDone Pos_ P
121. 50 kHz from x channel DT90048 DT90050 Using instruc to to 2 channels tion DT90049 DT90051 max 30 kHz i channels DT90200 DT90202 Using to to 3 channels DT90201 DT90203 max 20 kHz channels DT90204 DT90206 Using to to 4 channels DT90205 DT90207 max 20 kHz channels Two DT90044 DT90046 Using phase to to 1 channel Incre DT90045 DT90047 max 20 kHz mental channel decre DT90200 DT90202 Using mental to to 2 channels control DT90201 DT90203 max 15 kHz channels Decre mental 58 Notes 1 The value in parentheses is the reset input Reset input X2 can be set to either CHO or CH1 Reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CH3 2 For information on the minimum input pulse width see page 7 10 7 4 FP 7 2 Function Specifications and Restrictions Pulse output function Related instruc tions Maximum output frequency High speed counter channel no Input output contact number used CW CCW pulse or output direc tion output Memory area used Elapsed value area Control flag Home input Deviation counter clear output DT90052 DT90044 DT90046 lt bit4 gt to to DT90045 DT90047 Using 1 channel max 100 kHz xO channel Using 2 channels max 60 kHz chan nels DT90052 DT90200 DT90202 lt bit4 gt to t
122. 55 ivy 7 21 FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function 7 3 5 2 Positioning Operations With Double Speed Inverter Wiring example gt Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input Operation start 5 Encoder Output terminal Inverter Inverter operation YQ 3 3 Operation Stop Inverter Y1 2 3 Fast Slow high speed gt COM Operation chart allocation Encoder input Speed Operation start signal Inverter operation signal Inverter high speed signal 4500 5000 Positioning operation running Number of pulse n e Positioning operation start i Arrival at deceleration point vo l L_ P Positioning done pulse Y1 en Comparison instruction flag High speed counter CHO control flag 7 22 FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function FPWIN GR When 5 is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90044 and DT90045 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor be gins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops X5 R903A R108 R100 KX DF Positioning operations running 100 100 101 Positioning operations start R101 TR Resets elapsed value of high speed counter CHO Target value match OFF instruction YO
123. 57 6k bits s 70 Number of units stations 40 0 700 1000 1200 Transmission distance m For a transmission speed of 2 400 bits s to 38 4k bits s you can set up a maximum of 99 units stations and a maximum transmission distance of 1 200 m PLC link function specification see note 1 Communication method Token bus Transmission method Floating master method Transmission line Twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission distance 1 200 m 3 937 ft Total distance Transmission speed 115 2k bits s Baud rate Number of units stations Maximum 16 units see note 2 PLC link capacity Link relay 1 024 points link register 128 words Interface Conforming to RS485 connected via the terminal block Se Notes 1 A RS485 type communication cassette is required in order to use the PLC link function 2 Unit station numbers are specified using the switches on the control unit or the system registers A 8 gt A 3 Dimensions A 3 Dimensions A 3 1 Control Unit FPG C32T FPG C32T2 FPG C28P2 30 0 1 181 18 0 709 60 0 2 362 n B D 8 H nu n B E B
124. 6 Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execu tion of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action R904E Control flag for circular inter polation Turns ON when circular interpolation instruc tion F176 starts up and maintains that state until the target value is reached When the tar get value has not been reached even if the cir cular interpolation instruction execution condi tion is OFF that state is maintained Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execu tion of other high speed counter instructions and to verify completion of a circular interpola tion action When this flag is on other position ing instructions F171 to F176 cannot be started R904F Set value change con firmation 587 Notes This turns on when the circular interpolation instruction F176 starts up and this state is maintained of the next circular interpolation in struction F176 execution When conducting control with the continuous mode for performing continuous circular inter polation actions use this after circular inter polation instruction startup when overwriting the next target value e When the target value has not been reached and the execution condition is off circular interpolation control flag R904E turns on and other positioning instructions F171 to F176 cannot start up e Thecircular interpolation target value overwrite permission
125. 6 15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed R903B MX0 903 11 High speed counter control flag Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed R903C MX0 903 12 High speed counter control flag Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed R903D MX0 903 13 High speed counter control flag Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed R903E 96MX0 903 14 Not used R903F 0 903 15 Not used B 16 FPS B 4 of Special Internal Relays Relay No Matsushita IEC R9040 96 MX0 904 0 Not used Description R9041 96 MX0 904 1 COM port 1 PLC link flag Turns on while the PLC link function is used R9042 96 MX0 904 2 COM port 2 commu nication mode flag Goes on when general purpose serial communication is used Goes off when MEWTOCOL is used R9043 to R9046 96 MX0 904 3 to 96 MX0 904 6 Not used R9047 96 MX0 904 7 COM port 2 commu nication error flag Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data communication Goes off when a request is made to send data
126. 6 bit 01 D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by D1 and D2 to the right Left shift of one word 16 bit 01 D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one hexadeci mal digit 4 bit 01 D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by D1 and D2 to the right Left shift of one hexadeci mal digit 4 bit Data buffer instructio FIFO buffer define 01 D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by D1 and D2 to the left mm The n words beginning from D are defined in the buffer Data read from FIFO buffer The oldest data beginning from S that was written to the buffer is read and stored in D Data write into FIFO buffer The data of S is written to the buffer starting from D B 49 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions No Name Boolean Basic function instructions UP DOWN counter Operand Description Counts up or down from the value preset in S and stores the elapsed value in Left right shift register 16 bit data right rotation Shifts one bit to the left or right with the area between D1 and D2 as the register Rotate the n bits in data of D to the right 16 bit data left rotation Rotate the n bits in data of D to the left 16 bit data right rotation with carry flag data an Rotate the n b
127. 7 28 749 Aene 7 29 744 7 30 7 4 4 1 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Trapezoidal Control 7 30 7 4 4 2 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Home REWIN Tc 7 33 7 4 4 3 Pulse Output Instruction F172 JOG uiloenitertechebubeeToit45e oe 7 37 7 4 4 4 Positioning Control Instruction F174 Data Table Control 7 40 7 4 4 5 Pulse Output Instruction F175 Linear Interpolation 5 22 2 25 7 44 7 4 4 6 Pulse Output Instruction F176 Circular Interpolation 7 48 7 4 4 7 Pulse Output Control Instruction FO 7 57 7 4 4 8 Elapsed Value Write and Read Instruction 1 7 59 xi FPX Table of Contents TAS Sample PONS RH eR dC RR D EROR ROI E 7 61 7 4 5 1 Incremental Position Control Operation Plus Direci n porsi 245p ERQEoRdAS EARS ERSERER ONE 7 63 7 4 5 2 Incremental Position Control Operation Minus DIfaation RR ERE RR 7 66 7 4 5 3 Absolute Position Control Operation 7 69 7 4 5 4 Home Return Operation Minus Direction 7 72 7 4 5 5 Home Return Operation Plus Direction 7 75 7 4 5 6 JOG Operation Plus Direction 7 78 7 4 5 7 JOG Operation Minus Direction 7 80 7 4 5 8 Emergency Stop Over Limit 7 81 7 4 6 Sample Programs for Circular Interpolation
128. 77 5 90177 DT90178 5 90178 0790179 5 90179 Not used MEWNET WO PLC link status Duplicated destination for PLC inter link ad dress Counts how many times a token is lost Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected Counts how many times a signal is lost No of times undefined commands have been received No of times sum check errors have oc curred during reception No of times format errors have occurred in received data No of times transmission errors have oc curred No of times procedural errors have occurred No of times overlapping parent units have oc curred N A N A DT90180 to DT90189 96 MW5 90180 to 96 MW5 90189 Not used DT90190 9e MW5 90190 High speed counter control flag monitor for CHO DT90191 96 MW5 90191 High speed counter control flag monitor for CH1 DT90192 96 MW5 90192 High speed counter control flag monitor for CH2 This monitors the data specified in DT90052 43210 Home near input On HSC instruction Pulse output Continue 1 Clea Continue 1 Stop DT90193 5 90193 High speed counter control flag monitor for CH3 Hardware reset Enable 1 Disable Count Enable 1 Disable Software reset No 1 Yes DT90194 to DT90199 96 MW5 90194 to 96 MW5 90199 Not used B 31 FPS B 5 Table
129. 8 MTRN T 1 6 ENO SendString 0 s Start BytesToSend n Number 4 1 d Port 9 e Do not include the terminator end code the transmission data The terminator is added automatically e When STX FPWIN Pro or STX exist FPWIN GR is specified for the header start code in system register 413 or 414 do not add the header to the transmission data The header is added automatically e When using the 1 channel RS232C type communication cassette transmission does not take place until CS Clear to Send turns on If you are not going to connect to the other device connect to RS Request to Send e The maximum number of transmission bytes n is 2048 10 12 FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices 10 2 2 Receiving Data from External Devices Data input from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system register and the reception done flag goes on If the reception done flag is off data can be received at any time Data register DT Data reception l Device with RS232C port Reception done flag on FPX Programming example 4 words 8 characters received in the receive buffer at DT200 through COM port 1 are copied to DTO Explanatory diagram Data register DT Data reading 4142434445464748 buffer Data reception Reception done R9038 on Recep
130. Adr Of VarOffs I delivers only the text characters without the header characters 2 words For more information on the data type String please refer to the online help R9038 may change while a scan is being carried out To ensure proper execution of the program the status of the special internal relay should be copied to a temporary variable 10 23 FP 10 3 Connection Examples 10 3 2 1 1 Communication With FP Series PLC Connect the FPX and another FP series PLC using the RS232C interface and the MEWTOCOL COM communication protocol Communication mode General purpose serial communication Data area read command 01 0000000 00001 transmission Value of specified data register When the data area read command 96014 RDD00000 00001 is sent from the FPX side the values of the data register of the PLC connected to the system are sent as a response For example if the value K100 is stored in DTO and the value K200 is stored DT1 of the PLC 01 06400 8006 is sent as a response to the command If there is an error 01 OO Cg is returned OO is the error code In addition to data area read and write commands MEWTOCOL COM also provides contact area read and write as well as many other commands Communication mode Computer link FP series PLC
131. CHO CW to CH2 CW direction 2000Hz DT62 to DT63 Composite speed DT64 to DT65 Target position X axis Target position P3 X axis 10000 DT66 to DT67 Target position Y axis Target position P3 Y axis 10000 DT68 to DT69 Center position X axis Center Position Q X axis 10000 DT70 to DT71 Center position Y axis Center Position Q Y axis 5000 Work area DT72 to DT73 Operation result storage area Parameters calculated due to instruction execution are stored 7 86 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function Sample program Key Points Designate the control code rotation direction with from CHO CW direction to CH2 OW direction Use the circular interpolation control flag R904E to verify completion of the circular interpolation action FPWIN GR R9010 L F1 DMV H 1110 DT 60 1 Positioning data table Always Control code ON F1 DMV K2000 DT62 1 en ie Composite speed F1 DMV K10000 DT64 P3 X axis Target position J Center position setting method F1 DMV K10000 DT6 6 From to CH2 CW direction Absolute CW CCW Composite speed 2000Hz Target position 10000 10000 P3 Yaxis Target position Center position 10000 5000 F1 DMV K10000 DT68 Q X axis Center position Ft K5000 DT70 Q Y axis Center position XB R903A R903C R904E R2F R21 DF Circ
132. Computer link RS485 type General purpose serial General Terminal communication station station PLC link es 1 1 sho 2 5 FPS 2 2 Input Specifications 2 2 Input Specifications The input specifications below apply to all types of the control unit mem pee Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated input current For X1 X4 approx 8 mA For X2 X5 to X7 approx 4 3 mA For X8 to XF approx 3 5 mA Input points per common C32 C28 16 points common C24 8 points common to X7 1 common X8 to XF 1 common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to the common terminal Min ON voltage Min ON current For X1 X4 19 2 V DC 6 mA For X2 5 to 19 2 V mA Max OFF voltage Max OFF current 2 4 V DC 1 3 mA Input impedance For X1 X4 approx 3 For X2 X5 to X7 approx 5 6 For X8 to XF approx 6 8 kQ Response time OFF ON For input X1 X3 X4 1 ms or less normal input 5 us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings For input X2 X5 to X7 1 ms or less normal input 100 us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings For input X8 to XF 1 ms or less normal
133. Con AWG18 25 1Q km_ rinated mm x ductor Insulator or greater biphenyl 2C JIS Notes on Cable Use Please use shielded twisted pair cables Please use only one type of transmission cable Do not mix more than 1 type Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line ground one end 8 13 FPS 8 5 Cables Chapter 9 Computer Link FP 9 1 Overview 9 1 Overview A computer link is a communication connection between a computer and a PLC which allows monitoring and controlling the PLC operating status from a computer The computer and the PLC communicate via instructions commands from the computer to the PLC and response messages from the PLC to the computer A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC Communication speed and transmission format are specified in system registers no 413 COM port 1 and 414 COM port 2 Computer FP gt Command message Response message In a computer link the computer sends a command to the PLC and the PLC sends a response back to the computer Program for computer link For a computer link a program must be written e g in BASIC or C language that enables the computer to send command messages and receive response messages No communication program i
134. FALSE actiwates function Sfisend9ing STRINGpO AIABCDEFGH upto 30 chars mv ee RENI NERIS LSU oh T MANI s 3 VAR CONSTANT 1 StringHeader Size 1 word max no chars i 14 word current no chars LD Body Creating the send buffer 2 gt gt 2 5 1 ENO 4 SendString Adr s1 d 5 Offs 4 52 A NN A AdrLast Of Var BE SendString Var AdrLast Send sign of the send buffer via the serial interface 2 _ 1882 SendBulfer sur cx E ENO 421 421 2 T s Start ME n_Number SendString IN 1 _ 2222 6202 0527 Notes e When you do not wish to add the terminator end code during transmissions specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data set system register 413 or 414 to No STX FPWIN Pro or Terminator None FPWIN GR 10 11 FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices M Programming example The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator FPWIN GR RO 1 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 K 8 Specify 8 FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier Type Initial Comment Evam s SendData E45
135. HO pulses aoa DT606 Target value Y axis with user pro DT606 Target value Y axis 3 DT607 CH2 pulses 3 gram DT607 CH2 pulses DT608 Pass value X axis DT608 Center position DT609 CHO pulses DT609 axis CHO pulses DT610 Pass value Y axis DT610 Center position DT611 CH2 pulses DT611 axis CH2 pulses DT612 Operation result DT612 Operation result DT613 Radius pulses storage area DT613 Radius pulses storage area DT614 Center position SPEE DT615 CHO pulses culated due to in DT616 Center position Y struction execution DT617 axis CH2 pulses are stored here 1 Control code constant 5 1 5 H 0 Fixed L Operation connection mode 4 0 Stop 1 Continue 2 3 24 Rotation direction 5 0 from CH2 CW axis to CHO CW axis 1 from CHO CW axis to CH2 CW axis Circular Circular shape method 6 0 Pass position setting method 1 Center position setting method Position control mode and output method 00 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward off reverse on 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward off reverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off Composite speed frequency K constant 100 Hz to 20 kHz K100 to K20000 As a guide k
136. I code specified by S1 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D 001 32 bit binary data ASCII code 1 S2 D Converts the 32 bits of binary data S1 1 S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D 1 D ASCII code gt 32 bit binary data 1 2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 D B 47 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions 16 bit binary data 4 digit BCD data Boolean Operand Description Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example K100 H100 4 digit BCD data 16 bit binary data Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by S to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D Example H100 K100 32 bit binary data 8 digit BCD data Converts the 32 bits of binary data specified by S 1 S to eight digits of BCD data and stores it in D 1 D 8 digit BCD data 32 bit binary data Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by 5 1 S to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in 0 1 D 16 bit data in vert Inverts each bit of data of D 16 bit data complement of 2 Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts the sign 32 bit data complement of 2 Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and adds 1 inverts the sign 16 bit
137. Limit If XD OverrunSignal turns off while a pulse is being output from YO PulseOutCW the output of the pulse is stopped YO is used implicitly by F172 FPWIN GR H DF Hro MV H8 DT 90052 Pulse output control clear Fo wv HO DT 90052 FPWIN Pro The GVL shown on page 7 62 above applies to this program POU Header Class Identifier Initial Comment 5 EXTERNAL oe BOOL i Overrunning signal VAR EXTERNAL 3 1 lt n 5 5 VAR i Performs a forced stop tof the pulse output E MER m LAE esee eren Ge peii acce athain per Starts preset operation im lt M f iet xt Pulseoutputcontro clear OverrunSignal E_Any16_ToSpecDT E EN ENO N Stop Pulse Output Any16 Flag 5 uM US 52 Offs 2 5 se E Any ToSpecDT EN EN StartOperation Any16 Flag b Wee ura 52 Offs 7 81 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 6 Sample Programs for Circular Interpolation 7 4 6 1 Pass Position Setting Method Using the current position P as a reference designate the two points target position E and passing position S and then perform positioning control using circular interpolation In
138. MV instruction DT90048 96 MW5 90048 DT90049 96 MW5 90049 High speed counter elapsed value area For CH1 The elapsed value 32 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing the F1 DMV instruction DT90050 5 90050 DT90051 MW5 90051 High speed counter target value area The target value 32 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 or F167 is ex ecuted The value can be read by executing the F1 DMV instruction B 23 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC Description A Available N A Not available Reading Writing DT90052 5 90052 DT90053 5 90053 High speed counter and pulse output control flag Clock calendar monitor hour minute A value can be written with the FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear the high speed counter instruction Control code setting 15 L Channel setting 0 to 3 CHO to CH3 Home near input N A 0 Off 1 On High speed counter 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Hardware reset 0 Enable 1 Disable Cou
139. MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193 15 12 11 8 7 43 0 DT90052 Iul Channel specification HO to H3 CHO to CH3 Near home input 0 Off 1 High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Hardware reset 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes gt g Programming example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration FPWIN GR H Fo Mv 10 DT90052 Fo MV H 0 DT90052 NES 2 In the program the near home input is enabled in step 1 and O is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations 7 57 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro POU Header M Programming example 2 Performing a forced stop of the pulse output FPWIN GR x7 H Fo Mv 8 DT90052 FO MV H 0 DT90052 FPWIN Pro POU Header the de ____ FALSE E i GtopPulseDutput erforms a forced stop i Start Operation the pulse output 7 58 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 4 8 Elapsed Value Write and Read Instruction F1 This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the built in high speed counter Specify this F1 DMV instruction together with the special data r
140. Message display S Displays the character constant of S in the connected programming tool Read data 1 S2 D Reads n words of data from the shared memory ad dress S2 of the intelligent unit with the slot number specified as S1 and reads to the address starting at D Write data 1 S2 D ne Reads n words of data from area specified by S2 and writes it to the address starting at D of the intelli gent unit with the slot number specified as S1 Time addition 1 S2 D The time after S2 1 S2 elapses from the time of 8142 51 1 S1 is stored in 0 2 0 1 D Time substruction 1 S2 D The time that results from subtracting S2 1 S2 from the time 8142 51 1 S1 is stored 0 2 0 1 D Serial data communication D This is used to send data to or receive data from external device through the specified COM RS232C or RS485 port B 51 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions No Name Double word 32 bit data square root High speed counter and pulse output control Boolean rithmetic instruction Operand Description Steps D v S D 7 High speed counter and pulse output control instructions S DT90052 Performs high speed counter control according to the control code specified by S Change and read of the elapsed value of high speed counter S DT90044 Trans
141. N Pro 1 Double click PLC in the project navigator 2 Double click System Register 3 Double click Act on Error 4 Choose Enable in the list box of item no 4 Battery error indication Additional Information i Specifies the operation when duplicate use of output is programmed P verify error happens operation error is detected 9 y The error LED switch on if function is disabled 5 5 2 2 Specifying the Hold Area In order to use backup functions e g for data registers settings must be entered for system registers no 6 to 12 Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 Option PLC Configuration 2 Choose Hold Non hold 1 or Hold Non hold 2 tab Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 Double click PLC in the project navigator 2 Double click System Register 3 Double click Hold On Off 5 5 3 Lifetime The life of the backup battery will eventually expire and therefore it is important to replace it with a new battery periodically A guideline for a replacement interval is given below Item Description Battery lifetime 220 days or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 840 days at 25 C 70 F Suggested replacement interval 1 year Value when no power at all is supplied Backup battery Name Part no Battery for FPX AFPG804 Chapter 6 Wiring FP 6 1 Safety Instructions 6 1 Safety Instructions In certain
142. NET WO mode To use the PLC link function a link area needs to be allocated Set the allocations for both the link relays and link registers Link area allocations are specified using the system registers Range of link relays used for PLC link 0 to 64 words Range of link registers used for PLC link 0 to 128 words Start address of link relay send area 0 to 63 Size of link relay send area 0 to 64 words Start address of link register send area Oto 127 Size of link register send area Link relay allocation A 0 No 40 Range of link relays used for PLC link Receive area No 42 Send area Receive area 0 to 127 words Start address of link 4 relay send area No 48 Size of link relay send area Area not used Max 64 for PLC link words Link register allocation i Receive area No 44 Start address of link reg ister send area No 41 Range of link registers used Send area No 45 Size of link register send area for PLC link Receive area Area not used 128 for PLC link words Note Link areas consist of link relays and link registers for PLC link and are used with the respective control units A maximum of 1024 link relays points and 128 link registers words can be used in a PLC link area FPX 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters 11 2 3 1 Example The PLC link areas are divided into send and receive
143. Port No 410 Unit No fi x Cancel No 412 Comm Mode Bead 41 Wommunication komnat Baudiate Initial Ghar Bit 71 liiis Parity 99 w Header STX not exist Help Stop Bit fi w No41g Starting address for data received of 0 3759 serial data communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of x serial data communication mode 2048 0 2048 2 Select COM 1 Port tab There are separate settings for COM port 1 and COM port 2 No 412 Communication Comm Mode Select the COM port operation mode click on El and select PC Link FP 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 Double click PLC in the project navigator 2 Double click System Register 3 Double click COM Port There are separate settings for COM ports 1 and 2 No 412 COM port 1 selection Select the COM port operation mode click on z and select PC Link tem Name Data D 410 COM port 1 unit No 1 412 COM port 1 selection PC link 412 COM port 1 modem connection Disable i 11 2 2 Unit Numbers By default the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers In a PLC link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line the unit number must be set in order to identify the different PLCs The same number must not be used f
144. R Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system registers In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set system register nos 400 and 401 7 3 1 Types of Input Modes Incremental input mode Count 0 1 2 3 4 n 3 n 2 n 1 n Decremental input mode o o 3 5 A 5 5 5 A Two phase input mode Incremental input CW on o o eu Wu 0 1 2 n 1 n Decremental input CCW 7 9 FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function Incremental decremental input mode on e ot Count O 1 2 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 3 Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing Incremental decremental control input mode on MODEM EO dU o on 1 oe Count O 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 Increasing Decreasing 7 3 2 Minimum Input Pulse Width For the period T 1 frequency a minimum input pulse width of T 2 single phase input or T 4 two phase input is required Single phase Two phase T T be Ap SE 2 2 4444 FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function 7 3 3 Allocation As shown
145. R axis 3 Xs Ys Direction vet Mese 0 Direction 0 Fy irection a S a 9 i Xo Yo GHP axis Xo Yo P Xp Yp P Xp Yp E Xe Ye E Xe Ye Example c Example d S Xs Ys Fx S Xs M Fv 8 Fv Fy X CHO aw axis Xo Yo a x EHP axis P Xp Yp P Xp Yp Direction 4 Ye Direction 0 Direction b M Y E axi Y iP axis 1 Key Point Specification of the rotation direction changes in accordance with the axial direction and the CW CCW direction 7 49 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function Action of the flag concerning circular interpolation Table of flag Allocation Flag conditions The uses of flag in the program R903A Control flag CH1 Turns on during execution of pulse output in structions that include a circular interpolation instruction and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F176 Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execu tion of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action R903C Control flag CH2 Turns on during execution of pulse output in structions that include a circular interpolation instruction and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F17
146. RNS s n In FPWIN GR F144 TRNS is not available with the FP M 5 Programming example FPWIN GR RO S n D F159 MTRN 100 Ki Serial data communication Devices that can be specified for S Only data registers DT can be specified as the send buffer Devices that can be specified by WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD IO to ID K H Devices that can be specified by D Only the K constants only K1 and K2 gt 10 1 Overview FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier Type Initial Comment VAR SendData B i i Activates function SendData F159_MTRN EN ENO gt Send String 0 s Start x BytesTo Send n Number JL 1 d Port Se Note For an example on how to create the send buffer please see Example for F159 in the online help of FPWIN Pro Transmission of data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by S through the COM port specified by D FPWIN Pro d Data be sent with the header and terminator automatically attached A maximum of 2 048 bytes can be sent When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from COM port 1 Reception of data Reception of data is controlled by turning the reception done
147. Raise expansion hooks on top and bot tom of unit 2 Press unit on mount ing plate and align hooks with plate 3 Press hooks on top and bottom Removal from flat type mounting plate Procedure 1 Pull hooks on top and bottom of unit 2 Remove unit from mounting plate FP 5 3 Installation Using Flat Type Mounting Plate Attachment to DIN rail A unit with an attached flat type mounting plate can also be installed sideways on a DIN rail The flat type mounting plate AFP0804 should only be used with a stand alone control unit It should not be used if an FPO or FP expansion unit is attached to the control unit FP 5 4 Installation Using Slim 30 Type Mounting Plate 5 4 Installation Using Slim 30 Type Mounting Plate Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the slim 30 type mounting plate AFP0811 to the mounting panel The diagram below shows the dimensions of the mounting plate 10 mm 0 39 in HIL TH m C ls 30 mm 1 18 in 6 mm 0 24 Procedure 1 Fit upper hook of unit onto DIN rail 2 Without moving upper hook press on lower hook to fit unit into position Removal from Slim 30 Type Mounting Plate Procedure 1 Insert slotted screwdriver into DIN
148. S2 are transferred to the area starting at D Data write to F ROM 1 S2 D The data specified by 51 and S2 are transferred to the F ROM starting at D 16 bit data exchange D1 D2 01 D2 D2 D1 32 bit data exchange 01 D2 D1 1 D1 gt D2 1 D2 D2 1 D2 D1 1 D1 Higher lower byte in 16 bit data exchange D The higher byte and lower byte of D are exchanged 16 bit data block exchange Exchange the data between D1 and D2 with the data specified by B 44 FP B 7 Table of Instructions No Name Boolean Operand Description Binary arithmetic instructions 16 bit data addition S D D S D 32 bit data addition S D D 1 D 841 S 0 1 D 16 bit data addition Destination setting 51 S2 D 1 S2 D 32 bit data addition Destination setting S141 1 S241 2 0 1 D 16 bit data subtraction D S D 32 bit data subtraction 2 1 D 5 1 S 0 1 D 16 bit data subtraction Destination setting 1 S2 D 32 bit data subtraction Destination setting 1 S2 D S141 1 S241 S2 0 1 D 16 bit data multiplication 1 S2 D 1 x S2 D 1 D 32 bit data multiplication 1 S2 D S141 1 x S241 S2 0 3 D 2 0 1 D 16 b
149. Specifications and Restrictions Restrictions on maximum counting speed pulse output frequency 1 The maximum frequency when using the high speed counter and pulse output function is determined by the combination as shown in the table below Channel number being used Max frequency Pulse output High speed counter Pulse output High speed counter Incremental Two phase Incremental Two phase Decremental Incremental de Decremental Incremental de cremental cremental Incremental de Incremental de cremental control cremental control 1 If two channels are not executed simultaneously each axis may be used up to 100 kHz 2 See the table below for maximum counting speed pulse output frequency when linear circular interpolation is used Restrictions on maximum counting speed pulse output frequency 2 When using interpolation function The maximum frequency when using linear or circular interpolation is shown in the table below Channel number being used Max frequency Pulse output High speed counter Pulse output High speed counter Incremental Two phase Incremental Two phase Decremental Incremental de Decremental Incremental de cremental cremental Incremental de Incremental de cremental control cremental control Linear interpola tion Circular inter polation 1 These are the values when PC lin
150. T DUT Highest WORD fixed to 0000 i Lowest WORD Control code Acceleration deceleration time ms ontrol Code ontrol code 1641100 i Initial Speed 500 4 25 Duty iMaximumSpeed 5000 1 48Hz to 100kHz i AccelTime 300 200 Incremental CW CCW i i TargetVal 10000 i i PulseStop 0 LD Body MotorSwitch DataTable1 Control Code Ch wri 0 7 32 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 4 2 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Home Return This function performs home return according to the specified data table gt Programming example Pulses are output from Y1 and a return to the home position is carried out at an initial speed of 100 Hz a maximum speed of 2 000 Hz and an acceleration deceleration time of 150 ms Pulse output diagram without near home input Home ASA sensor on 2000 Hz 100Hz 0 Hz gt 150 ms Pulse output diagram with near home input XA on Near home Home sensor on sensor on 2000 Hz 100 Hz 0 Hz gt 150 ms 150 ms Positioning data table Control code 1 1121 Initial speed 2 100 Hz Maximum speed 2 2000 Hz Acceleration deceleration time 3 150 ms Deviation counter clear signal 4 Not used 7 33 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function Home return operation modes There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP
151. T l 01 60 13 57 57 Fax 01 60 13 57 58 www matsushita france fr Matsushita Electric Works Deutschland GmbH Rudolf Diesel Ring 2 83607 Holzkirchen Germany Tel 08024 648 0 Fax 08024 648 555 www matsushita de Matsushita Electric Works UK Ltd Irish Branch Office Waverley Old Naas Road Bluebell Dublin 12 Republic of Ireland Tel 01 460 09 69 Fax 01 460 11 31 www matsushita ie Matsushita Electric Works Italia s r l Via del Commercio 3 5 2 1 Ferlina 1 37012 Bussolengo VR Italy Tel 045 675 27 11 Fax 045 670 04 44 www matsushita it Matsushita Electric Works Portugal Espa a S A Portuguese Branch Office Avda 25 de Abril Edificio Alvorada 5 E 2750 512 Cascais Portugal Tel 21 482 82 66 Fax 21 482 74 21 Matsushita Electric Works Scandinavia AB Sj ngsv gen 10 19272 Sollentuna Sweden Tel 46 8 59 47 66 80 Fax 46 8 59 47 66 90 www matsushita se Matsushita Electric Works Espana S A Parque Empresarial Barajas San Severo 20 28042 Madrid Espana Tel 91 329 38 75 Fax 91 329 29 76 www matsushita es Matsushita Electric Works Schweiz AG Grundstrasse 8 CH 6343 Rotkreuz Switzerland Tel 041 799 70 50 Fax 041 799 70 55 www matsushita ch Matsushita Electric Works UK Ltd Sunrise Parkway Linford Wood East Milton Keynes MK14 6LF England Tel 01908 231 555 Fax 01908 231 599 www matsushita co uk North amp South America USA Asia China Hong Kong Japan
152. TEPRUN 0 140 Error 0 Hold Break Mode 0 Message E Help Advance Unit 0 OpeEn 2 Break Enable 0 Remote 2d Force flaq 0 External El 0 Self Diagnosis Error Message EmorCode 45 Operation Error Occurred To display the status display dialog box select Online Status Display 13 4 FPS 13 2 Troubleshooting Procedure for FPWIN Pro In online mode select Monitor PLC Status x CPU Type FP SIGMA 12k Version 1 2 r Connection Link Unit No Network Station HOME Scan Time PLC Memory Partitions Current O 5ms Program Size 0 Steps Minimum 0 5 Machine Language Size Steps Maximum 1 0 ms File Register Size 0 Words PLC Mode Flag r PLC Error Flag RUN Mode E Self diagnostic Error REMOTE Mode Operation Error First Error Step 0 gt 0 1 ee Last Error Step 0 gt O Task 1 BREAK Battery Error ode Break Valid Battery is hold Dutput Enable Voltage Dip O times Step Mode Fuse Blown E Fuse Blown Slots ron Vul 1 0 Verification Slots Interrupt Enabled Intelligent Unit a Intelligent Unit Slots PLC Message Self diagnostic Error eee Error 00 Clear Self Check Upload No Error Error code is 1 to 9 Close Condition There is a syntax error in the program Procedure 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error Procedure 2 Execute
153. ToSpecDT instruction NC Tool Library uses the FO instruction internally to copy PLC independent data from the 16 bit variable at input Any16 to the special data register defined by the value at input Offs The variable input Any16 is thus copied to the data register DT 9000 Offs or DT 90000 Offs For the high speed counter in the FP this data register is DT90052 The output flag is not used FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function 7 3 4 2 Elapsed Value Write and Read Instruction F1 This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90044 The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90044 and DT90045 Use the F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value High speed counter control flag area of FP The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown below Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 LLLI Channel specification HO to H3 CHO to CH3 Near home input 0 off 1 on High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Hardware reset 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes 4 M Programming example 1 Changing the elapsed value
154. Unit no Turns on when unit no 15 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Unit no Turns on when unit no 16 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode B 18 FP B 4 of Special Internal Relays Relay No Description Matsushita IEC R9070 MEWNET WO Unit no Turns on when unit no 1 is in RUN mode 0 907 0 PLC link operation Turns off when unit no 1 is in PROG mode mode relay m R9071 Unit no Turns on when unit no 2 is in RUN mode 907 1 Turns when unit no 2 is in PROG mode R9072 Unit no Turns on when unit no 3 is in RUN mode 0 907 2 Turns off when unit no 3 is in PROG mode R9073 Unit no Turns on when unit no 4 is in RUN mode 0 907 3 Turns off when unit no 4 is in PROG mode R9074 Unit no Turns on when unit no 5 is in RUN mode 0 907 4 Turns off when unit no 5 is in PROG mode R9075 Unit no Turns on when unit no 6 is in RUN mode 96MX0 907 5 Turns off when unit no 6 is in PROG mode R9076 Unit no Turns on when unit no 7 is in RUN mode 96MX0 907 6 Turns off when unit no 7 is in PROG mode R9077 Unit no Turns on when unit no 8 is in RUN mode 0 907 7 Turns off when unit no 8 is in PROG mode R9078 Unit no Turns on when unit no 9 is in RUN mode 96MX0 907 8 Tur
155. W direction FPWIN GR R903A R903C R904E R1 DF Positioning start itioni Con Con Positionin itioni Paste stat Flag trolfiag trol done rumnng 9 In case of R903A R903C and R904E are OFF CHO CH2 flag if XB turns ON positioning is started 2 DF _ AA mci Data preset Fosiioning running Shift register preset 1 1 H1 WR 1 1 Elapsed value area preset Shift register F1 DT 90044 Elapsed value area CHO F DMV 90200 R10 Elapsed value area CH2 Data setting for the control from P1 to P2 Data setting from P1 to P2 1 F1 10010 DT 1000 Control code Control code Continue mode from CH2 CW to CHO CW direction F1 DMV K1000 DT 1002 Pass position setting method Composite speed Absolute Composite speed 1000Hz Target position P2 1000 0 Pass position 61 500 250 F1 DMV 1000 DT1004 P2 X axis Target position F1 DMV Ko DT 1006 Y axis Target position ch2 1 DMV K500 1008 1 X axis Pass position cho F1 250 0 1010 S1 Y axis Pass position ch2 LILI LILI LILI 7 98 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function R11 1 Data setting from P2 to 1 F1 11010 DT 1000 Control code Data setting for the control from P2 to Q 5 a Continue mode from CHO CW to CH2 CW direction Lr
156. a to other units 11 10 FPX 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters 11 2 3 2 Partial Use of Link Areas In the link areas available for PLC link link relays with a total of 1 024 points 64 words and link registers with a total of 128 words can be used This does not mean however that it is necessary to reserve the entire area Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays and internal registers Link relay allocation Receive area Range of link relays used for PLC link Start address of link relay send area Size of link relay send area With the above settings the 14 words 224 points consisting of WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays Not used Range of link registers used for PLC link Start address of link register send area Size of link register send area With the above settings the 28 words consisting of LD100 to LD127 can be used as internal registers Not used 11 11 FP gt 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters 11 2 3 3 Precautions A mistake in the link area allocation will cause an error and communication will be disabled Avoid overlapping send areas When sending data from the send area to the receive area of another send and receive areas must match In the example shown below there is an overlapping area between units no 2 and 3 and this will cause an error so that communication cannot be carried out
157. a transmission command The internal relay R10 turns on when the transmission condition RO turns on Data conversion 01 RDDO0000 is converted to ASCII code and written to DT101 to DT106 00001 is converted to ASCII code and written to DT107 to DT112 Data transmission The data in the send buffer is sent from COM port 1 Reception done detection The internal relay R11 turns on when the reception done contact R9038 turns on Retrieving received data The received data in the receive buffer is read from the area in which it is stored DT201 to DT208 and sent to DTO Check of received data To determine whether the received data is a normal response the comparison in struction is used to check whether the character string 19 is stored in DT1 Check of received data The eight character ASCII code beginning with DT3 is converted to a hexadecimal value and stored in DT50 and DT51 Preparing to receive the next data To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point KO and turns off the reception done contact R9038 10 28 FP 10 3 Connection Examples FPWIN Pro POU Header 4 T FALSE 1 word chars 11 word current no chars i Received StringHeaderSize i SendBuftfer 1 In FPWIN Pro it is more convenient to use the data type String With this data type it is easier to handle st
158. above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T 16 43 x 8 2 79 5 139 23 ms Calculation example 5 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms 0 096 Each 23 32 64 x 407 Tpc Ttx x Pcm 0 096 x 407 39 072 ms Each Ts 5 39 072 44 072 ms 0 096 x 13 2x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 44 072 x 2 1 632 5 94 776 ms Calculation example 6 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 32 relays and 2 register words have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 1ms 0 096 Each Pem 23 1 1 x42 31 Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 31 2 976 ms Each Ts 2 976 3 976 ms 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 3 976 x 2 1 632 1 10 584 ms 58 Notes e In the description stations that have been added refers to stations which are connected between station no 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on e Comparing examples 2 and 3 the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not been adde
159. adder cess 144 to 159 DT90070 MW5 90070 Step ladder pro cess 160 to 175 DT90071 MW5 90071 Step ladder pro cess 176 to 191 DT90072 5 90072 Step ladder pro cess 192 to 207 DT90073 5 90073 Step ladder pro cess 208 to 223 DT90074 5 90074 Step ladder cess 224 to 239 DT90075 MW5 90075 Step ladder pro cess 240 to 255 DT90076 5 90076 DT90077 5 90077 Step ladder pro cess 256 to 271 Step ladder pro cess 272 to 287 DT90078 5 90078 Step ladder cess 288 to 303 DT90079 5 90079 Step ladder cess 304 to 319 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder pro cess When the process starts up the bit correspond ing to the process number turns on Monitor using binary display Example 15 11 7 T 1 3 0 Bit no T 15 11 7 3 ON DT90060 0 Process no 1 Executing 0 Not executing A programming tool software can be used to write data B 27 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC A Available N A Not available Description Reading Writing DT90080 5 90080 Step ladder cess 320 to 335 DT90081 5 90081 Step ladder cess 336 to 351 DT90082 5 90082 Step ladder pro cess 352 to 367 DT90083
160. airborne dust metal particles or salts Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Excessive vibration or shock Direct sunlight Water or oil in any form including spray or mist e Avoid noise interference from the following sources Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges If noise occurs in the power supply line even after the above countermeasures are taken it is recommended to supply power through an insulation transformer noise filter or the like e Measures regarding heat discharge Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat 5 2 FP 5 1 Important Notes Do not install the FP control unit as shown below Installation which blocks the air duct Installations such that Input and output the input and output connectors on top connectors face down Horizontal installation of the unit Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such as heaters transformers or large scale resistors FP 5 1 Important Notes e Installation space Leave at least 50 mm 1 97 in of space between the wiring ducts of the unit an
161. al relay see note 2 49 double words DWRO DWR96 MDO 0 00 96 Code for specifying 32 internal relay points as double word 32 bits of data Link relay 32 double words DWLO DWL62 MD7 0 MD7 62 Code for specifying 32 link relay points as double word 32 bits of data B 4 FPS B 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Number of points Data register see note 2 16382 double words Memory area available for use Matsushita DDTO DDT32763 IEC MD5 0 05 32763 Function Data memory used ina program Data is handled in 32 bit units double word 64 double words Link data register see note 2 DLDO DLD126 MD8 0 08 126 shared data memory which is used within the PLC link Data is handled in 32 bit units double word 512 double words Timer counter set value area see note 2 5 0 5 1022 MD3 0 MD3 1022 Data memory for storing a target value of a timer and an initial value of a counter Stores by timer counter number 512 double words Timer counter elapsed value area see note 2 DEVO DEV1022 MD4 0 MD4 1022 Data memory for storing the elapsed value during operation of a timer counter Stores by timer counter number 130 double words Special data register m o o o 9 5 o 2 2 5 o 5 B Im e E DDT900
162. alue area Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored Registers the contact to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored Registers the data to be monitored Monitoring start Monitors a registered contact or data using MD and MC Preset contact area fill command Embeds the area of a specified range a 16 on and off pattern Preset data area fill command Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Remote control Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Abort se Notes Aborts communication e Commands and responses used with the FP have dedicated header start code which has been added to the MEWTOCOL COM communication protocol of the FP series PLCs e The content of the specified header varies depending on the communication conditions With the FPX in addition to ordinary MEWTOCOL COM an expansion header is supported to send single frames of up to 2 048 characters Type of header No of characters that can be sent in 1 frame Max 118 characters lt Max 2048 characters e Th
163. an error occurs at an FP expan sion I O unit the bit corresponding to the unit no will turn on Monitor using binary display 15 11 7 3 2 1 O bitno 3 2 1 O unit no on error off normal DT90003 5 90003 Not used DT90004 MW5 90004 Not used DT90005 MW5 90005 Not used DT90006 5 90006 Position of abnormal intelli gent unit for left side ex pansion When an error condition is detected in an intelligent unit the bit corresponding to the unit no will turn on Monitor using binary display 1511 7 T 1 error off normal 3 2 1 O bitno T 1 3 2 1 DT90007 96 MW5 90007 Not used DT90008 96 MW5 90008 Not used DT90009 96 MW5 90009 Communication error flag for COM 2 Stores the error contents when using COM port 2 DT90010 9e MW5 90010 Position of I O verify error unit for FPO right side expansion When the state of installation of an FPO expansion unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit correspond ing to the unit no will turn on Monitor us ing binary display 15 11 7 T 3 2 1 O bitno T 2 1 O unit no on error off normal B 20 FP gt B 5 Table of Special Data Registers A Available N A Not available Address Description Reading Writing Matsushita IEC DT90011 Position of I O verify e
164. and reading data Program capacity 12 000 steps Number of instructions Basic 85 High level 220 Operation speed 0 4 us step for basic instruction Operation Relay memory points External input relay X 512 points see note 7 1 184 points see note 7 External output relay Y 512 points see note 7 1 184 points see note 7 Internal relay R 1 568 points RO to R97F see note 1 Timer Counter T C 1 024 points see note 1 and 2 for initial setting timer 1 008 points TO to T1007 counter 16 points C1008 to C1023 Timer ms or 1 s Counter Counts 1 to 32767 Counts each unit up to 32767 times units 1 ms 10 ms 100 Link relays L 1 024 points see note 1 Memory area Data register DT 32 765 words DTO to DT32764 see note 1 Link data register LD 128 words see note 1 Index register I 14 words 10 to ID Differential points Unlimited Master control relay points MCR 256 Number of labels JP and LOOP 256 Number of step ladders 1 000 stages A 4 FPX A 2 Performance Specifications Dno TEENS Number of subroutines 100 subroutines Pulse catch input 8 points XO to X7 Number of interrupt programs 9 programs 8 external input points to X7 1 periodical interrupt point 0 5 ms to 30s Self diagnosis function E g
165. anged to SYS1 11 18 Additions product numbers for power supply unit p 6 3 F172 target value ranges p 7 37 addresses appendix Additions Control units PNP output type FPG C28P2 Thermistor input function type part numbers ending in TM Expansion units Add information about intelligent units FPWIN Pro examples added to new sections Information on initial frequency of pulse output instructions added LOBAL NETWORK CE 4 Aromat Corporation Europe Europe Austria Benelux France Germany Ireland Italy Portugal Scandinavia Spain Switzerland UK Matsushita Matsushita Matsushita Matsushita Electric Works Electric Works Electric Works Electric Works Ltd Automation Controls Group Matsushita Electric Works Europe AG Rudolf Diesel Ring 2 D 83607 Holzkirchen Tel 08024 648 0 Fax 08024 648 111 www mew europe com Matsushita Electric Works Austria GmbH Josef Madersperger StraBe 2 A 2362 Biedermannsdorf Austria Tel 02236 2 68 46 Fax 02236 46133 www matsushita at Matsushita Electric Works Benelux B V De Rijn 4 Postbus 211 5684 PJ Best 5680 AE Best Netherlands Tel 0499 37 2727 Fax 0499 372185 www matsushita nl www matsushita be Matsushita Electric Works France S A R L 44 F 91371 Verri res le Buisson CEDEX France
166. applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons e Power ON timing differences between the PLC system and input output or motorized devices e An operation time lag when a momentary power failure occurs e Abnormality in the PLC power supply circuit or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction that results in a system shutdown choose the adequate safety measures listed below Interlock circuit When a motor s clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit that prevents clockwise and counter clockwise signals from being input into the motor at the same time Emergency stop circuit Add an emergency stop circuit externally to controlled devices in order to prevent a system shutdown or an irreparable accident if a malfunction occurs Start up sequence The PLC should be operated only after all of the outside devices are energized To ensure this sequence the following measures are recommended e Turn ON the PLC with the mode selector set to PROG mode and then switch to RUN mode e Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized 0527 Note When stopping the operation of the PLC also have the input output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together Use an exclusive ground
167. arget value of a timer and an initial value of a counter Stores by timer counter number Timer counter elapsed value area see note 2 1024 words EVO EV1023 4 0 4 1023 Data memory for storing the elapsed value during operation of a timer counter Stores by timer counter number Special data register 260 words DT90000 DT90259 5 90000 MW5 90259 Data memory for storing specific data Various settings and error codes are stored Index register 14 words 10 0 MWE 0 MWE 14 Can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier Memory area double word see note 4 External input relay see note 1 FPG C32T C32TTM 16 double words DWX0 DWX30 1 1030 Code for specifying 32 external input points as a double word 32 bits of data External input relay see note 1 FPG C32T2 C32T2TM FPG C24R2 C24R2TM FPG C28P2 37 double words DWXO DWX73 1 1073 Code for specifying 32 external input points as a double word 32 bits of data External output relay see note 1 FPG C32T C32TTM 16 double words DWY0 DWY30 Code for specifying 32 external output points as double word 32 bits of data External output relay see note 1 FPG C32T2 C32T2TM FPG C24R2 C24R2TM FPG C28P2 37 double words DWY0 DWY73 Code for specifying 32 external output points as double word 32 bits of data Intern
168. ata registers Data register Description Details number User setting DT1000 to 1001 Control code Continue mode Absolute Pass position setting area method DT1002 to 1003 Composite speed 1000Hz DT1004 to 1005 Target position X axis Target position X axis P2 P3 and P4 DT1006 to 1007 Target position Y axis Target position Y axis P2 P3 and P4 DT1008 to 1009 Pass position X axis Target position S1 52 and S3 DT1010 to 1011 Pass position Y axis Target position Y axis S1 S2 and 53 Work area DT1012 to 1017 Operation result storage Parameters calculated due to instruction execution area are stored Elapsed val DT90044 to Elapsed value area CHO Current position X axis 0 ue area 90045 DT90200 to Elapsed value area CH2 Current position Y axis 0 90201 7 97 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function Sample program Key Points To overwrite the data after startup use the circular interpolation data overwrite permission flag R904F In control that heads toward final point P4 designate by switching the control code to the stop mode In this example since the rotation direction changes for each positioning point designation of the control code rotation direction is as follows 1 Between P1 and P2 FromCH2 CW to CHO CW direction 2 Between P2 and P3 FromCHO CW to CH2 CW direction 3 Between P3 and P4 FromCH2 CW to CHO C
169. ata table R904F 1 bit shift F109 BTL Ki Set value Shift register 1 bit shift change confirmation 7 9 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro GVL OS van GLOBAL VAR GLOBAL ut DataTbl P 1toP2 ULSE ARC PASS ut DataTbl P2toP3 ULSE_ARC_PASS utDataTbIPStoP4 PULSE ARC PASS HSC Elapsed Value Area ontrol Code 16410010 peed 1000 argetPos_X 1000 argetPos_Y 0 assPos_X 500 ontrol Code 16411010 i Speed 1000 iTargetPos X 2000 iTargetPos Y 0 assPos ontrol Code 168210010 i Speed 1000 iTargetPos X 3000 iTargetPos Y 0 iPassPos 2500 7 100 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function LD Body bPositionStart bHSC Flag fe ll Ha s RS PosOperDone s cna abit i i H i bPositioningDore ShiftRegister iChO_ElpsValArea E toe 0 iCh2_ElpsValArea bControl PitoP2 gt dutDataTbl P1toP2 bControl P2toP3 gt dutDataTbI P2toP3 bControl P3toP4 dutDataTbI PStoP4 bCircintOwerwrit iShiftRegister iShiftRegister 7 101 FP 7 5 PWM Output Function 7 5 PWM Output Function With the F173 PWMH instruction the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained When using the PWM output function set the channels CHO and CH2 with system re
170. ature Input at 24 VDC Number of 32 m dd and 26 4 points per 29 VDC common which are si multaneous ON 52 55 118 6124 Ambient temperature C F Output at 24 VDC 32 and 26 4 Number of points 29 VDC common which are si multaneous 52 55 118 6124 Ambient temperature C F Internal circuit diagram Input M 6 8 Xn 5 e 820 Q Inside Output Output display LED Output terminal a x External power o o 8 lap oe supply 24 VDC supply Tor 3 load 5 to 9 5 OV 24 VDC Phase fault protection 3 7 FPS 3 5 Specifications of FPX Expansion Unit Terminal layout diagram 58 Note The I O numbers on the connector refer to the first expansion unit Input connector left 24V DC The COM terminals are connected internally with the same connector Output connector right 510 24 V DC Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector it is recommended that they also be connected externally Front view of connector Y100 Y108 X108 X100 3 8 Chapter 4 Allocation FPX 4 1 General
171. bits s to 115 2k bits s Baud rate 19 200 bits s when a C NET adapter is connected see notes 2 4 and 5 Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits parity none even odd data length 7 bits 8 bits see notes 2 Start codes No STX STX End codes CR CR LF None ETX Number of units stations Maximum 99 units stations 32 units stations max when a C NET adapter is connected see notes 3 4 and 5 Interface Conforming to RS485 connected via the terminal block 0527 Notes 1 In order to use the serial communication function 1 N communication a RS485 type communication cassette is required 2 The transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are specified using the system registers A 7 FP A 2 Performance Specifications 3 Unit station numbers are specified using the system registers Up to 31 units stations can be set using the switches on the control unit 4 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units stations transmission distance and transmission speed baud rate vary depending on the connected device 5 The values for the transmission distance transmission speed baud rate and number of units stations should be within the values noted in the graph below For transmission speed 115 2k bits s 99 For transmission speed
172. c communication area settings for GT10 GT30 To perform communication with a PLC the data area reserved for communication must be set in the GT10 GT30 The factory settings for the basic communication area of the GT10 GT30 are as shown below The GT configuration settings should be changed to match the application at hand mem Word area DTO to DT2 Bit area WRO to WR2 The basic communication area is changed using the configuration parameter settings for the programmable display and the GT Configuration dialog Basic Setup tab in the GTWIN screen creation tool x Basic Setup Communication Parameters Auto Paging Start up Screen Setup Hold Device Value OK Title Cancel Model Matsushita MEWNET FP GT Model GT10 Monochrome RS2 hitialize Basic Communication Area to PLC Mode 4 mode mo Word Area m Clear Bit Area Cancel WRO to 9 13 FP 9 3 1 N Communication 9 3 1 N Communication For a 1 N computer link the computer and the FPX are connected through a commercially available RS232C RS485 conversion adapter and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses The computer sends a command specifying the unit number and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the computer FP gt
173. can be connected on the right side of the FP control unit A combination of relay output types and transistor output types is also possible I 00008000 80806000 60006000 00800000 00000000 NNI 9 eo rol I RI 008080 0_00806060 00800 I Iri 00606060 00000000 8 0 aa aL LR CET nfinfin n 60608060 moo gt o mo poa gt NAiS Maximum expansion 3 units FP X C32T FP control unit Expansion Expansion Expansion intelligent unit 1 intelligent unit 2 intelligent unit 3 Controllable points Number of I O points Number of I O points when Mies Ores ie nie on control unit using FPO expansion units FPG C32T FPG C32TTM 32 points max 128 points FPG C32T2 FPG C32T2TM po FPG C28P2 28 points max 124 points FPG C24R2 FPG C24R2TM 24 points max 120 points 1 1 Number of points is when combined with FPO transistor type expansion unit se Note Install the FPO Thermocouple Unit on the right side of other expansion units 1 6 FP 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 3 2 R
174. cassette three wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 2 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible FPG COM2 System register settings For 1 1 communication using a computer link the system registers should be set as shown below e Settings for COM port 1 Set value COM port 1 unit number 1 COM port 1 selection of communication mode Computer link Communication format for COM port 1 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Header STX not exist Baud rate setting for COM port 1 9600 bps to 115200 bps 9 9 FP 9 2 Connection Examples e Settings for COM port 2 Name Set value COM port 2 unit number 1 COM port 2 selection of communication mode Computer link Communication format for COM port 2 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Header STX not exist Baud rate setting for COM port 2 9600 bps to 115200 bps The communication format and baud rate communication speed should be set to match the connected computer Connection to the computer e Using 1 channel RS232C type communication cassette Computer side FPZ side 5 D SUB 9 pin mo Recoved Daia Rb cs certo Send cs fa e Using 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette Computer side sid
175. change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status To register these settings choose OK Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 2 3 Double click PLC in the project navigator Double click System Register To change a set value write the new value as indicated in the system register table Online gt Online mode Online gt Download Program Code and PLC Configuration This downloads the project and system registers To download system registers only Online gt PLC Configuration select System Registers choose Download to PLC B 7 B 3 System Registers 4 Table of System Registers Starting number setting for counter Default value 1008 Descriptions Oto 1024 Hold type area starting number setting for timer and counter 1008 Oto 1024 These settings are ef fective if the optional backup battery is Hold type area starting number setting for internal relays 90 0 to 98 installed e If no backup battery is Hold type area starting number setting for data registers 32710 used do not change the default settings Other wise proper functioning 0 to 32765 Hold or non hold setting for step ladder process Non hold Hold Non hold of hold non hold values cannot be guaranteed Hold type area starting number for PLC link relays 64 0 to 64 Hold type area starting number for PLC li
176. citive 6 11 FPX Table of Contents 6 6 Wiring the MIL Connector Re ERO 6 12 6 7 ue Terminal Block RC ic 6 14 Chapter7 High Speed Counter and Pulse Output 8 7 2 7 2 Function Specifications and Restrictions 7 4 223x422 7E d3ddEKE 31d daddidipRdapadu dad qd sd 7 4 FE 7 6 fos BOOMO MMO 22 050 3e RU db Ep EPI UE baden P bcd 7 8 7 3 High Speed Counter Function 7 9 7 9 1 Types of Input Modes rk re eer b EP ERR ES 7 9 732 Minimum Input Pulse Width 7 10 Taa EO aiam edid 7 11 OS CURE 7 12 7 3 4 1 High Speed Counter Control Instruction FO 7 12 7 3 4 2 Elapsed Value Write and Read Instruction F1 7 14 7 3 4 3 Target Value Match ON Instruction F166 7 16 7 3 4 4 Target Value Match OFF Instruction F167 7 17 7 3 5 Sample Programs 7 19 7 3 5 1 Positioning Operations With Single Speed ERE gt eres 7 19 7 3 5 2 Positioning Operations With Double Speed rs eap 7 22 78 Pulse Output d dd 7 26 7 4 1 Pulse Output Methods 7 27 TAE VS FCA aen tipici
177. communication Communication format for COM port 1 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Header No STX Baud rate setting 9600 bps Starting address for receive buffer Set the desired address Receive buffer capacity Set the desired capacity max 2 048 bytes The transmission format and baud rate transmission speed should be set to match the connected devices 10 34 FP 10 6 Flag Operation in Serial Communication 10 6_Flag Operation in Serial Communication This section explains the operation of the reception done and the transmission done flag in serial communication 10 6 4 Header No STX Terminator CR Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Data received from A B CR D E F G external device Cannot be stored when reception done flag is on on Reception done flag R9038 or R9048 F159 MTRN on Duplex transmission disabled instruction wie F159 MTRN is being execution off executed Transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 off Transmitted data 1 2 3 CR Stored ae y Receive A A A A Write pointer E E E buffer B B B B F F Number of bytes 1 2 3 0 l
178. composite speed so that component speed of each axis is 1 5 Hz or greater Specify the initial frequency to 30 kHz or less 3 Acceleration deceleration time ms constant KO to K32767 If this is 0 pulses will be output for the initial soeed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration 4 Target value K 8388608 to K8388607 When operating only one axis a In incremental position control mode set the target value for the axis which will not be operated to 0 b In absolute position control mode set the target value for the axis which will not be operated the same as the current value 5 Component speed initial speed and maximum speed of each axis This is stored as 2 words in real numbers type Composite speed x movement distance X axis component speed X axis movement distance Y axis movement distance d Composite speed x Y axis movement distance Y axis component speed 5 movement distance Y axis movement distance 2 Example Even if the initial speed is corrected See 6 the calculation value will be stored as is in the operation result storage area 6 Frequency range The system automatically selects the frequency range for each component of each axis Range 0 1 5Hz to 9 8kHz Range 1 48Hz to 100kHz Range 2 191Hz to 100kHz a Maximum speed 9800Hz 7 45 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function If initial speed lt 1 5 2
179. ction table shaped control The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses are output from CHO Positioning done pulse 1 second 0 1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1 second timer TMX 0 K10 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro The GVL and DUT shown on page 7 62 apply to this program POU Header Positioning start signal High speed counter control flag for CHO Positioning in progress Positioning done pulse Control code 1641110 JF DUT ontrol Code 1681110 i Initial Speed 200 11 25 duty iMaximumSpeed 4000 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz iAccelTime 250 i 10 Absolute CW and CCW t TargetVal 22000 3 RS Pos Oper Done _PosOperDone TP Xem 2222 RS PosOperDone Pas dll aE Flag mm Pos Progress DataTable1 Control Code 0 T PosOperDone dox Pro ess HSC CHO Flag E s pee een PosOperDone T80 5s 7 71 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 5 4 Home Return Operation Minus Direction When XA HomeReturnStart turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 PulseOutCCW of the specified channel CHO and the return to home begins When X3 NearHomeSensorln turns on deceleration begins and when X2 HomeSensorlnput turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed
180. ction Example 0527 Note Make sure the same unit number is not used for more than one of the PLCs connected through the PLC link function Link area allocation e Link relay allocation FPS FPS Unit 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 WLO WLO 19 20 Receive area 39 No 3 20 Send area 63 63 System Name Set value of various control units No 40 Range of link relays used for PLC link Receive area No 42 Start address of link relay send area No 43 Size of link relay send area e Link register allocation FPS FPS FPS Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 LDO No 1 P Send area ammm Receive arca 39 39 Receive area No 2 Send area 79 Receive area 80 e Receive area Send area 7 127 System Name Set value of various control units 1 2 No 3 No 41 Range of link registers used for PLC link No 44 Start address of link register send area No 45 Size of link register send area e Setting the largest station number Name Set value of various control unit No 1 No 2 No 3 Largest station number setting for PLC link 3 11 16 FP 11 4 Connection Example Connection diagram FPX FPX FPX Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 The final unit terminal station should The final unit terminal station should be shorted between the transmission be shorted between the transmission line and
181. d Constants B 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Number of points External input relay see note 1 FPG C32T C32TTM Memory area available for use Matsushita X0 X31F IEC 9261X0 0 9 31 15 External input relay see note 1 FPG C32T2 C32T2TM FPG C24R2 C24R2TM FPG C28P2 X0 X73F 261X0 0 1 73 15 Function Turns on or off based on external input External output relay see note 1 FPG C32T C32TTM YO Y31F QX0 0 QX31 15 External output relay see note 1 FPG C32T2 C32T2TM FPG C24R2 C24R2TM FPG C28P2 YO Y73F QX0 0 QX73 15 Externally outputs on or off state Internal relay see note 2 RO R97F MX0 0 0 97 15 Turns on off only within program Link relay see note 2 LO L63F MX7 0 0 MX7 63 15 Shared relay used for PLC link Timer see notes 2 and 3 TO T1007 C1008 C1023 1 0 1 1007 2 1008 2 1023 Goes on when the timer reaches the specified time Corresponds to the timer number Counter see notes 2 and 3 C1008 C1023 0 1007 2 1008 2 1023 1 0 1 1007 Goes on when the timer increments Corresponds to the timer number Special internal relay 176 R9000 R910F 0 900 0 0 910 15 Turns on off based on specific conditions Used as a flag Memory area words External input relay 32 words see note
182. d other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 50 mm 1 97 in or more 50 mm 1 97 in or more Maintain a minimum of 100 mm 3 937 in between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit 100 mm 3 937 in or more Panel door PLC unit Other device Keep the first 100 mm 3 937 in from the front surface of the control unit open in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring 5 4 FP 5 2 Attachment to DIN Rails 5 2 Attachment to DIN Rails The FP can easily be attached to DIN rails Procedure 1 Fit upper hook of unit onto DIN rail 2 Without moving upper hook press on lower hook to fit unit into position Removal is very simple too Procedure 1 Insert slotted screwdriver into DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull attachment lever downwards 3 Lift up unit and remove from rail FP 5 3 Installation Using Flat Type Mounting Plate 5 3 Installation Using Flat Type Mounting Plate Use M4 size pan head screws for the attachment of the flat type mounting plate AFP0804 The diagram below shows the dimensions of the mounting plate o wW g ur ca 60 0 mm 2 36 in AF P0804 z E Procedure 1
183. d output when the execution condition trigger turns on d 4 Programming example While XB is ON a pulse of 300Hz is output from YO Pulse output diagram XB JOG command off 300 Hz Data table Control code 1 Frequency 2 1 Control code H constant 0 Fixed Target value setting 3 0 Mode with no target value 1 Target value match stop mode can only be specified for ver 2 0 or higher Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 2596 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Output method 00 No counting CW 01 No counting CCW 10 Incremental counting CW 12 Incremental counting Direction output off 13 Incremental counting Direction output on 21 Decremental counting CCW 22 Decremental counting Direction output off 23 Decremental counting Direction output on 2 Frequency Hz K constant 1 5 Hz to 9 8 KHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 48 Hz to 100 KHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 191 Hz to 100 KHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Specify the initial frequency to 30 kHz or less 7 37 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 3 Target value absolute value can only be specified for
184. d to the link As a result the PLC link response time is longer e The SYS1 instruction be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there are one or more stations that have not been added to the link 11 19 FP 11 5 PLC Link Response Time 11 5 1 Reducing the Transmission Cycle Time If there are stations that have not been added to the link the time link addition processing time and with this the transmission cycle time will be longer Tsn Tit Tso T max Ts1 Ts2 Tik Tic link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tils link error stop command sending time Tso master station scan time With the SYS1 instruction the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced Thus SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time 4 g Programming example Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PLC link from the default value of 400 ms to 100 ms FPWIN GR SYS1 MPCLK1TO 100 Key words Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1TO Permissible range for key word no 2 10 to 400 10 ms to 400 ms FPWIN Pro POU Header Since Matsushita addresses and strings are entered directly instead of using variables no POU header is required LD Body otis 52 5 55 5 29014 934 ENENO PCLK1TO 100 s se Notes e The
185. data ab solute Gives the absolute value of the data of D 32 bit data ab solute Gives the absolute value of the data of D 1 D 16 bit data sign extension Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 bits in D 1 D Decode Decodes part of the data of S and stores it in D The part is specified by n 7 segment decode Converts the data of S for use in a 7 segment display and stores it in D 1 D Encode Encodes part of the data of S and stores it in D The part is specified by n 16 bit data digit combine The least significant digit of each of the words of data beginning at S are stored united in order in D 16 bit data digit distribute Each of the digits of the data of S are stored in distributed to the least significant digits of the areas beginning at ASCII code conversion S D Twelve characters of the character constants of S are converted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 16 bit table data search 1 S2 S8 The data of S1 is searched for in the areas in the range S2 to S3 and the result is stored in DT90037 and DT90038 32 bit table data search 1 S2 S8 The data of S1 1 S1 is searched for in the 32 bit data designated by S3 beginning from S2 and the result is stored in DT90037 and DT90038 B 48 FPS B 7 Table of Instruction
186. e Micro Imagechecker A200 A100 Communication cassette The following types of communication cassettes can be used with 1 1 general purpose serial communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FPX communication cassette five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 1 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication RS CS control is possible FPG COM1 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a FPX communication cassette three wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 2 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible FPG COM2 System register settings In the default settings the COM port is set to computer link mode For 1 1 general purpose serial communication the system registers should be set as shown below 10 18 FPS 10 3 Connection Examples e Settings for COM port 1 Set value General purpose serial communication Communication mode Communication format 8 bits Header No STX Baud rate 9600 bps Starting address for receive buffer 200 Receive buffer capacity e Settings for COM port 2 50 words 100 bytes Set value Communication mode General purpose serial communication Communication format 8 bits Header No STX Baud rate 9600 bps
187. e radian The data in degrees of an angle specified in S 1 S is converted to radians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data radian gt degree The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees and the result is stored in D 1 D B 58 FP B 7 Table of Instructions No Name Boolean Operand Description Floating point type real number data processing instructions Floating point 1 S2 S1 1 1 gt 8241 S2 R900A on type data S141 1 8241 S2 R900B on compare 8141 1 lt 8241 52 gt R900C on Floating point 51 S2 S3 8141 1 gt S341 S3 gt 900 on type data band 8241 S2 x S141 1 lt S3 1 S3 gt R900B on compare 8141 1 lt S241 S2 gt R900C on Floating point 51 S2 When S141 51 gt S341 S3 8141 S1 D 1 D type data upper S3 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D and lower limit control When S1 1 S1 S341 S3 lt S2 1 S2 S844 S3 0 1 D Floating point When S1 1 51 gt 53 1 S3 type data dead S844 S3 S141 S1 D 1 D band control When 52 1 S2 lt 63 1 3 S341 3 S241 2 gt D 1 D When S141 1 lt 63 1 53 x S241 S2 0 0 D 1 D Floating When S341 S3 lt 0 0 point type data S341 S3 S1
188. e Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when XO turns on FPWIN GR XO IMDF Fo Mv 90054 Fo MV H512 DT 90055 Fo 8000 DT 90058 Inputs 0 minutes and 0 seconds Inputs 12th hour 5th day Set the time FPWIN Pro LD Body NUM A E MOVE aug EN ENO 18680000 a Num DT30054 Inputs 0 minutes and E MOVE EN ENO 1620512 a Num 0 seconds 0730055 5 E EN ENO Sets the ti me 18689000 a Num inputs 12th hour Sth day 7 12 10 FP 12 3 Clock Calendar Function 12 3 3 Sample Program for Fixed Schedule and Automatic Start In this example the clock calendar function is used to output the YO signal for one second at 8 30 a m every day Here the hour minute data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time FPWIN GR R9010 Feo CMP DT 90053 H 830 L Data comparison instruction The value of the special data register DT90053 Hour R900B RO minute data is compared with the value of H830 8 30 Comparison match is output RO TO YO ____ HDF Appointed time output pulse 1 second YO TMX 0 K10 0 1 type timer K10 is set and used as a 1 second type timer The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits
189. e home return CW and deviation counter reset 25 Type home return CCW and deviation counter reset 26 Type home return Direction output off and deviation counter reset 27 Type home return Direction output on and deviation counter reset 30 Type home return CW 31 Type II home return CCW 32 Type Il home return Direction output off 33 Type home return Direction output on 34 Type II home return CW and deviation counter reset 35 Type II home return CCW and deviation counter reset 36 Type II home return Direction output off and deviation counter reset 37 Type home return Direction output on and deviation counter reset 2 Frequency Hz K constant 1 5 Hz to 9 8 KHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 48 Hz to 100 KHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 191 Hz to 100 KHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Specify the initial frequency to 30 kHz or less 3 Acceleration deceleration time ms K constant With 30 steps K30 to K32767 With 60 steps K36 to K32767 4 Deviation counter clear signal ms K constant 0 5 ms to 100 ms KO to K100 Set value and margin of error 0 5 ms or less Specify KO when not using this signal or when specifying 0 5 ms Acceleration deceleration time setting Set the acceleration deceleration time so that it is the same or great
190. e 5 pin D SUB 9 pin Transmitted Data 1 mr Received Daan ERR se 55 To other device Programming For a computer link a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side The PLC automatically sends back a response to a command No communication program is required on the PLC side Also if a software program such as PCWAY is used on the computer side PLC data can easily be read and written without having to think about the MEWTOCOL COM protocol 9 10 FP 9 2 Connection Examples 9 2 2 1 1 Communication With Programmable Display GT10 GT30 1 1 computer link with a programmable display GT10 GT30 connects the FPX and the programmable display using an RS232C cable Communication is performed via commands from the programmable display and responses from the PLC No program is required for communication Simply set the mutual communications settings to operate the PLC via the programmable display Programmable display GT10 GT30 RS232C Communication cassette The following types of communication cassettes can be used for 1 1 computer link communication Description This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FPX communication cassette five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 1 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication RS CS con
191. e If only one pulse output point is being used either one point of the two phase high speed counter or three points of the single phase high speed counter may be used A 6 FPX A 2 Performance Specifications Serial communication specifications 1 1 communication see note 1 C NENNEN ZEN Communication method Half duplex transmission Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line RS232C Transmission distance 15 m 49 21 ft Transmission speed 2 400 bits s to 115 2k bits s see note 2 Baud rate Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits parity none even odd data length 7 bits 8 bits see note 2 Start codes No STX STX End codes CR CR LF None ETX Interface Conforming to RS232C connected via the terminal block 58 Notes 1 In order to use the serial communication function 1 1 communication a RS232C type communication cassette is required 2 The transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are specified using the system registers Serial communication specifications 1 N communication see note 1 Communication method Two wire half duplex transmission Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission distance Maximum 1 200 m 3 937 ft see notes 4 and 5 Total distance Transmission speed 2 400
192. e transmission speed should be set to match the connected computer se Note When a C NET adapter is used the maximum number of units stations is 32 Unit numbers station numbers By default the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings There is no need to change this for 1 1 communication but if 1 N communication is used to connect multiple PLCs to the transmission line e g in a C NET the unit number must be specified so that the destination of the command be identified The unit number is specified either by using the system register settings in the FPWIN Pro or FPWIN GR programming tool or the unit number setting switch on the side of the FP control unit Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid so that a unit number between 1 and 99 can be set e Setting unit numbers with the setting switch The unit number setting switch is located underneath the cover on the left side of the FP control unit By setting the selector switch and the dial a unit number between 1 and 31 can be set Unit no station no setting switch Selector Dial switch switch ALS 555 12 FP 9 3 1 N Communication Table of switch settings and related unit numbers Unit number Dial switch position Selector Selector switch off switch on 16
193. e condition S1 1 S1 52 1 S2 32 bit data comparison AND Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data the comparative condition S1 1 1 S241 S2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 S2 1 52 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 S241 52 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt 2 1 S2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 2 1 52 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt 2 1 S2 Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 x S241 S2 32 bit data comparison OR Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 S2 1 52 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 S2 1 S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt 2 1 S2 Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 2 1 S2
194. e number of characters that can be sent is limited by the type of header and the command 9 6 FPS 9 1 Overview 9 1 4 Setting Communication Parameters By default the COM port is set to computer link mode For communication system register settings should be entered for operation mode communication format baud rate and receive buffer The settings are entered using the FPWIN Pro or FPWIN GR programming tool Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 Options gt PLC Configuration Configuration p08p FP Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold2 Action on Error Time Link High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port COMI Port COM2 Port No 410 Unit No MM No 412 Comm Mode Computer Link 7 Modem Enabled No 413 Communication Format No415 Baudriate Hee Initialize Char 8Bis 7 Terminator c R 7 S600 bps Parity Odd Header STX Help StopBit 1 g Starting address for data received of p EES serial data communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of pos p Notti serial data communication mode 2046 2 Select COM 1 Port 2 Port tab There are separate settings for COM 1 and COM 2 No 412 Communication Comm Mode Select the COM port operation mode click on and select Computer Link No 413 for COM 1 port No 414 for COM 2 port Communication Format setting Default
195. e output function programming example 7 57 1 high speed counter function programming example 7 14 pulse output function programming example 7 59 F166 programming example 7 16 F167 programming example 7 17 7 19 7 22 F171 home return programming example 7 33 F171 trapezoidal control programming example 7 30 F172 programming example 7 37 F173 programming example 7 102 F174 programming example 7 40 F175 programming example 7 44 F176 programming example 7 48 Features 1 2 Flag operation in serial communication 10 35 Flat type mounting plate 5 6 FP Sigma units 3 4 FPO units 1 5 3 3 FPWIN Pro conventions B 2 G General purpose serial communication 8 3 10 2 1 1 communication 10 18 1 N communication 10 34 connection example 10 18 10 24 flag operation 10 35 header 10 35 10 36 programming example 10 3 10 10 10 13 receive buffer 10 7 receiving data 10 3 10 13 10 33 10 35 sending data 10 2 10 8 10 37 ASCII conversion 10 32 system register settings 10 4 terminator 10 35 10 36 Grounding 6 2 6 6 FPS Index H Header general purpose serial communication 10 35 10 36 Hexadecimal code table B 61 High speed counter function 7 2 7 9 control instruction FO 7 12 elapsed value write and read instruction F1 7 14 7 59 specifications 7 4 A 6
196. e transmission line and the E terminal in the final unit terminal station 9 18 Chapter 10 General Purpose Serial Communication FPZ 10 1 Overview 10 1 Overview In general purpose serial communication data is sent and received over the COM ports to and from an external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the COM port by means of an FP program and the FP data registers Image processing device Sending data using F159 MTRN Data is sent by transferring the data to a data register and then transmitting it Data register using the F159 MTRN instruction Transmitted data Received data Receiving data Data is received by transferring the data from the RS232C port to the data regis ter specified in the system register as the receive buffer and then being stored there automatically 10 1 1 Outline of Operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general purpose serial communication function the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used The F159 MTRN instruction and the reception done flag are used in these operations to transfer data between the FP and an external device Sending data Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored in the data register used
197. ea of the receive buffer Header and terminator start and end codes are not stored Beginning of reception Re opening Received data T nr U V on R9038 R9048 Execution condition on RO Y y Execution of Reception Reception Reception is F159 MTRN is possible is not pos possible sible 2 When the terminator end code is received the reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns on Reception of any further data is prohibited 3 When an F159 MTRN instruction is executed the reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns off the number of received bytes is cleared and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower order byte 10 14 FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices FPWIN GR R9038 R10 Ho J R10 10 BKMV DT201 DT204 DTO The contents of the four words from DT201 to DT204 are written to data registers DTO to DT3 Reception done detection The internal relay R10 is turned on when the reception done contact R9038 turns on Retrieving received data The received data in the receive buffer is read from the area in which it is stored DT201 and sent to DTO R10 H F159 MTRN DT100 K1 Preparing to receive the next data CD To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point KO and turns off the reception done contact R9038 are sent from COM port K1 The
198. ead from the area in which it is stored from DT201 and sent to DTO 201_ 07204 j Reception Preparing to receive the next data To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point and turns off the reception done contact R9038 based on the empty data 10 22 FP 10 3 Connection Examples FPWIN Pro GVL Class Identifier Matsushit IEC Adare Type Initial J cLosAL 3d ReceivedData iDT200 MWS 200i ARRAY 0 4 OF WORD 3j 0 POU Header Identifier Type Initial BOOL ARRAY 0 6 OF WORD al ReceptionDone BOOL Transmission SendData F85 0H 45 d SendString 1 SendData F159_MTRN ENO SendString 0 s Start 2 n Number V en ove 1 d Port Reception ARED vm 10 ReceptionDone e EN eceivedData 1 51 d TargetArea 0 eceivedData 4 s2 R9033 is the reception done flag for ReceptionDone F159_MTRN EN ENO Dummy s Start diee RSR 0 n Number sem see 1 9 Porn In FPWIN Pro it is more convenient to use the data type String With this data type it is easier to handle strings containing more than 12 characters Therefore Adr_Of_VarOffs_I is recommended instead of F95 ASC
199. eceive buffers when the sample program is run Send buffer Receive buffer DT100 K2 Number of DT200 Number of bytes to be bytes re DT101 53 5 H25 transmitted DT201 ceived Statuses before DT202 Received data is stored in order from the lower order byte transmission peas DT204 Statuses when reception is completed 10 21 FP 10 3 Connection Examples FPWIN GR RO R1 R10 HH res ASC M S e DT101 Ten spaces inserted Fis9 MTRN DT100 _ K2 With DT100 as the send buffer the contents consisting of two bytes of it are sent from COM port 1 K1 Data transmission command The internal relay R10 turns on when the transmission condition RO turns on Data conversion The start command 96S character is con verted to ASCII code and written to DT101 to DT106 c o o E 7 c e 2 Data transmission The data in the send buffer is sent from COM port 1 K1 R9038 R11 I R11 HH The 4 word contents from DT201 to DT204 are written to data registers to DTS R11 159 DT100 Starting from DT100 the contents of 0 bytes are sent from COM port 1 K1 Reception done detection The internal relay R11 turns on when the re ception done contact R9038 turns on Retrieving received data The received data in the receive buffer is r
200. ector housing Tip If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure connected the contact puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section 0527 Note e lf using MIL connector for flat cables specify the product no AXM110915 FP 6 7 Wiring the Terminal Block 6 7 Wiring the Terminal Block Screw type terminal blocks are being used The suitable wires are given below e When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire e Do twist the wires to connect them e Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration e After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire e If the socket in the terminal block closes upon counter clockwise rotation the connection is wrong Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise P Counter clockwise Wire CORRECT INCORRECT Wire Terminal block Number of 9 pins Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co Model MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 Product number 1840434 Suitable wires Size Nominal cross sectional area cross sectional Nominal cross sectio
201. ed result is stored in the D 32 bit binary data gt Gray code conversion Converts the 32 bit binary data of S 1 S to gray code and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D 16 bit gray code binary data conversion Converts the gray codes of S to binary data and the converted result is stored in the D B 53 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions 32 bit gray code binary data conversion Boolean Operand Description Converts the gray code of S 1 S to binary data and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D Bit line to bit column conversion The values of bits line 0 to 15 of S are stored in bit column of D to D 15 Bit column to bit line conversion Character strings instructions Comparing character strings 1 2 The values of bit column of S to S 15 are stored in bits line 0 to 15 of D These instructions compare two specified character strings and output the judgment results to a special internal relay Character string coupling 1 S2 D These instructions couple one character string with another Number of char acters in a char acter string S D These instructions determine the number of characters in a character string Search for char acter string 1 S2 D The specified character is searched in a character string Retrieving data from character string
202. eed setting is 20 kHz Use the range of the formula given below as a guide when setting the composite speed Fv Hz pulse x 10 t ms Composite speed Hz Radius pulse t Scan time ms Example Radius r 1000 pulse Scan time 5ms 1000 p x 10 5 ms 2000Hz 0527 Note Accuracy may be degraded if the scan time exceeds 10 ms If this should happen execute circular interpolation instruction F176 using the periodical interrupt function with an interrupt time of around 0 5 ms Restrictions on positioning data setting Designate settings for the target position pass position and stop position so they are within the following range 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171 designate so the target value is within the above range even in those instructions 7 52 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function Positioning data table Pass position setting method Center position setting method DT600 DT600 DT601 Control code 1 DT601 Control code 1 DT602 Composite speed 2 DT602 Composite speed 2 DT603 Hz DT603 Hz DT604 Target value X axis DT604 Target value X axis Setting DT605 CHO pulses Designated DT605 C
203. eep the composite speed within the range of the formula below Fv Hz radius pulse x 10 scantime ms Target position and pass position K 8388608 to K8388607 Operation connection mode Stop When stop 0 is specified it will stop when the target position is reached Continue When the following circular interpolation data table is overwritten when continue 1 is specified after circular interpolation action begins the following circular interpolation begins when the first 7 53 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function 5 6 circular interpolation that was started up finishes target position reached To finish specify stop 0 for this flag operation connection mode after the last circular interpolation action has started Rotation direction Pulses are output according to the designated direction Operation differs as indicated below depending on the pass position and rotation direction setting CH2 CH2 CW Direction 1 CW Direction 0 zn CHO E CHO cw cw Circular Circular shape method Pass position setting method The center position and the radius of the arc are calculated by specifying the pass and target positions for the current position Center position setting method The radius of the circle is calculated by specifying the center and target positions for the current position Positioning path Direction 1 Direction 0 Y CH2 x Current position S Xs Ys 4 X CHO Pa
204. egister DT90044 The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90044 and DT90045 Use only this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value High speed counter control flag area of FP The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown below Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193 15 12 11 8 7 43 0 UL Channel specification HO to H3 CHO to CH3 Near home input 0 off 1 High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Hardware reset 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes For information on the special data register for the high speed counter function and the pulse output function see pages 7 4 and 7 5 gt Programming example 1 Writing the elapsed value FPWIN GR 7 Set the initial value of K3000 the DMV DT90044 high speed counter 7 59 FPx 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier Initial Comment jBOOL FALSE Activates the function LD Body The E Any32 ToSpecDT instruction NC Tool Library copies PLC independent data from the 32 bit variable at input Any32 to the special data register defined by the value at i
205. el RS485 type part no FPG COM3 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a two wire RS485 port It supports 1 N computer links and general purpose serial communication Terminal layout Signal direction Transmission line Transmission line Transmission line Transmission line Terminal station setting 8 2 2 Ports The Tool port provided as a standard feature of the FPX is treated as COM port 0 The ports on the communication cassette are treated as COM port 1 and COM port 2 The principle applications of the various ports are described below COM port 0 No communication cassette installed Tool port Computer link 1 channel RS232C type installed Tool port Computer link 2 channel RS232C type installed Tool port Computer link 1 channel RS485 type installed Tool port Computer link COM port 1 Computer link General purpose Computer link General purpose Computer link General purpose PLC link COM port 2 587 Notes Computer link General purpose e MEWTOCOL COM can be used on all ports which support computer link With MEWTOCOL COM the same commands are supported on all three channels and frames of up to 2 048 bytes header are possible e General purpose serial communication is only possible on COM port 1 and COM port 2 8 6 FP 8 2 Device Description 8 2 3 Communica
206. em registers 3 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting 4 Double words cannot be specified with FPWIN GR B 5 FP B 3 System Registers B 3 System Registers System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used B 3 1 Precautions When Setting System Registers Sytem register settings are effective from the time they are set However MEWNET WO PLC link settings input settings Tool and COM port communication settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialization operation is performed all system register values parameters set will be initialized B 3 2 Types of System Registers Hold non hold type settings system registers 5 to 8 10 12 and 14 The values for the timer and counter can be specified by using system register no 5 to specify the first number of the counter System registers no 6 to no 8 no 10 no 12 and no 14 are used to spec
207. en transmitted the S value is cleared to 0 and the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 turns on FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices gt Programming example following program transmits the characters ABCDEFGH to an external device using COM port 1 Explanatory diagram Data register DT Data transmission using pr F159 MTRN Device with RS232C port The characters are converted to ASCII code and the data is stored in the send buffer 4142434445464748 ABCDEFGH FPWIN GR RO R1 gt gt Data transmission command The internal relay R10 is turned on when the R10 transmission condition RO turns on Data conversion The characters ABCDEFGH are converted to an ASCII code and written to DT101 to DT104 F95 M ABCDEFGH 101 R10 F1S9MTRN DT100 are sent from COM port 1 K1 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 ABCDEFGH is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register 2 The data is sent from COM port 1 using the F159 MTRN instruction Data transmission The data in the send buffer is sent from the COM port 1 e Jr 10 10 FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier Type Initial Comment i van ad Send BOOL
208. ent output No 2 0 Judgment output No 1 1 OK Connection to Micro Imagechecker A200 A100 e Using 1 channel RS232C type communication cassette Micro Imagechecker side FP side 5 mb Received Daia PD Request to Send 6 e Using 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette Micro Imagechecker side FP side 5 Ri Received Datat_ RD 5 R2 Received Data2 RD 7 co per To other device 10 20 FP 10 3 Connection Examples Procedure of communication In the following example the Micro Imagechecker is connected to COM port 1 Ye aso Cow J 7 onm J Ladder program Micro Imagechecker Start command SCp is set in send buffer Data transmission with F159 MTRN 9039 off and R9038 off Receive buffer writing point reset 2 O Start command S Cp transmission Transmission done flag R9039 on c o 2 E 7 c s g Scan result 1012345Cg is received EI i Reception done flag R9038 on Data read 1012345 Empty data transmission with F159 MTRN R9039 off and R9038 off amp Receive buffer writing point reset Reception oocooo ooo Buffer statuses The following shows the statuses of the send and r
209. er 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90248 PLC link MW5 90248 unit station no 8 or 16 DT90249 MW5 90249 DT90250 5 90250 0790251 5 90251 System regis ter 40 and 41 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings pertaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example When DT90219 is 0 Higher byte T Lower byte DT90240 to T DT90243 1 1 Unit station no 6 Setting contents of system register 40 42 44 and 46 Setting contents of system register 41 43 45 and 47 A N A DT90252 to DT90255 96 MW5 90252 to 5 90255 Not used DT90256 5 90256 Unit no station no switch monitor for COM port Used by the system B 34 FPS B 6 Table of Error Codes B 6 Table of Error Codes This section contains the syntax check error codes and self diagnostic error codes for the B 6 1 Syntax Check Error Codes Name Operation Description and steps to take status E1 see note Syntax error A program with a syntax error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error E2 see note Duplicated output error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay This error
210. er than the value of the following formula Acceleration deceleration time t ms Steps x 100 Frequency f Hz Depending on the number of steps the acceleration deceleration time may sometimes be longer than the set value Example According to the following calculation when the acceleration deceleration time is 100 ms and the number of steps is 30 the actual acceleration deceleration time will be 120 ms 100 ms 30 steps 3 3 ms 4 ms 4 ms x 30 steps 120 ms 7 35 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN GR F1 DMV H1121 DT200 F1 DMV K100 DT202 F1 DMV K2000 DT204 F1 DMV KO DT208 c3 c Lc F1 DMV K150 DT206 F171 SPDH DT200 KO FPWIN Pro DUT i Highest WORD fixed to 0000 owest WORD Control Code Initial frequency Target frequency Hz Time between Fmin and Fmax in ms Deviation counter clear signal in ms j i Control Code 1641121 fi For Control Code 16841124 iFmin 100 31 25 duty i Fmax 2000 1 48 to 100 kHz i AccelTime 150 121 Home position return type CCW Motor Switch 7 36 FP 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 4 3 Pulse Output Instruction F172 JOG Operation This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desire
211. ere The number of words is specified in system regis Received data ter no 417 no 419 storage area The system register numbers in parentheses refer to COM port 2 10 7 FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices 10 2 Communication with External Devices This section explains data transmission and data reception when communicating with external devices Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers 10 2 1 Sending Data to External Devices Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT and when the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the data is output from the COM port Data register DT Data transmission using Data writing F159 MTRN Device with RS232C port Data table for transmission send buffer When transmission begins DT100 When transmission ends KO Data table before transmission Data is transmitted in order from the low order byte Explanation of data table The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S At the beginning of transmission the number of bytes to be transmitted is set At the end of transmission 0 is set Transmission data storage area The circled numbers indicate the order of transmission 10 8 FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices Use an FO MV or F95 ASC instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmis
212. erter 5 LSB thermistor accuracy 5 LSB indicates a margin of error of 5 for the post A D conversion value 0 to 1 000 Thermistor Resistance and Digital Conversion Value The following formula is used to convert the thermistor resistance into a digital value The digital conversion value varies between KO and K1000 1024 x 2 2 Digital conversion value 5 Thermistor resistance kQ 2 2 12 Suitable Thermistors A thermistor with a resistance value of 2000 to 75 can be used Manufacturer Thermistor Type B constant Measurement range guide C Shibaura Electronics 50 to 100 C 0 to 150 C 100 to 220 C 150 to 300 C 12 4 FP 12 2 Thermistor Input Functions 587 Notes Notes on Wiring e Make sure the length of the cable between the gt control unit and thermistor is less than 10 m e Useathin electrical cable AWG28 length 150 mm for the leader Wire and bundle the electrical cable to avoid undue stress e If the conversion value does not remain stable we recommend adding an external capacitor or the like FP 12 2 Thermistor Input Functions 12 2 2 Loading Thermistor Temperature Data You can load the analog data corresponding to the thermistor resistance by reading in the FP s special data register Corresponding Special Data Register Notation on control unit Thermistor number Special data register Converted digital
213. ess FPG COMS3 25 mA or less A 3 FPS A 2 Performance Specifications 2 Performance Specifications Number of control lable I O points Control unit Descriptions FPG C32T C32TTM 32 points DC input 16 NPN output 16 FPG C32T2 C32T2TM 32 points DC input 16 NPN output 16 FPG C24R2 C24R2TM 24 points DC input 16 relay output 8 FPG C28P2 28 points DC input 16 PNP output 12 With FPO expan sion units Max 128 points up to 3 units Max 128 points up to 3 units Max 120 points up to 3 units When using transistor out put type expan sion units Max 124 points up to 3 units With FPX expan sion units Not possible Max 288 points up to 4 units Max 280 points up to 4 units When using transistor out put type expan sion units Max 284 points up to 4 units When using NPN output type expansion units With FPO and FPx expansion units Max 384 points up to 3 FPO units and 4 FPX units Max 376 points up to 3 FPO units and 4 FPX units When using transistor out put type expan sion units Max 380 points up to 3 FPO units and 4 FPX units When using NPN output type expansion units Programming method Control method Relay symbol Cyclic operation Program memory Built in flash ROM without backup battery Exclusive instructions allow writing
214. estrictions on the Number of FP gt Expansion Units Up to four dedicated FPX expansion units be added on the left of the The 64 point expansion unit has 32 inputs 32 NPN transistor outputs seh 00000000 00000000 o o rcu aero Qt ute a 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 _ 00000000 00000000 FP C32T Expansion unit 4 Expansion unit 3 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 1 Control unit bo Maximum expansion 4 units Controllable Points Number of I O points Number of I O points when using sect on control unit FPX expansion units FPG C32T2 FPG C32T2TM 32 points max 288 points 1 2 FPG C28P2 28 points max 284 points 2 FPG C24R2 FPG C24R2TM 24 points max 280 points 2 1 The FPG C32T and FPG C32TTM cannot be used as FPX expansion units 2 Number of points is when combined with NPN type expansion unit 1 7 FPX 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 Programming Tools Tools needed for programming 1 Programming tool software To program the FP use the
215. evice or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply FP 13 2 Troubleshooting Check of input condition 4 Input indicator LEDs are ON Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool f the input monitored is OFF there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer f the input monitored is ON check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the program again referring to the following Check for the duplicated use of outputs and for outputs using the high level instruction Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MC or JP is used FP 13 2 Troubleshooting 13 2 5 A Protect Error Message Appears When a Password Function is Used Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 Tool Set PLC Password Set PLC Password Untitlel X PLC Home peration Mode Close Force Cancel Protect Unprotect He Password Enter in hex 2 Select Access 3 Enter a password 4 Choose Settings Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 Online PLC Password Change Password PLC Password Modify Download Clear m PLC Login Logout 2 Enter password 3 Choose OK 13 10 FP 13 2 Troubleshooting 13 2 6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN Condition A syntax error or a self diagnosed erro
216. f output points which are simultaneously ON Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature C32 C28 Number of 16 2 Number of 12 5 points per at 26 4 V DC points per at 26 4 V DC common 1 which si which are si multaneously 8 multaneously ON ON 467 527 55 42 47 55 114 8 125 6 131 0 Ambient temperature C F 107 6 116 6 131 0 Ambient temperature C F 2 8 FPX 2 3 Output Specifications Internal circuit diagram YO Y1 Y3 Y4 Output indicator LED Output _ External power supply E Y Load T 24v pc 2 5 power supply Fa E 510 24 V DC o amp OV Y2 Y5 to YF Output indicator LED Output L External power supply 3 3 Y T 24v Dc o o power supply g tan 5n 510 24 V DC D 8 OV Phase fault protection circuit FP gt 2 3 Output Specifications 2 3 2 Relay Output Specifications These output specifications apply to the C24 control unit Dp DEIN NNNM Output type 1a 1 Form A Normally open Rated control capacity 2A250 V AC 2A30 V DC 4 5 A per common or later Output point
217. fers S41 S to high speed counter elapsed val ue area DT90045 DT90044 See note DT90044 D Transfers value in high speed counter elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D See note Target value much on with channel specification S D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Target value much off with channel specification Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Pulse output with channel specification Trapezoidal control and home return Positioning pulses are output from the specified chan nel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse output with channel specification JOG operation Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output with channel specification PWM output is output from the specified output in ac cordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse output with channel specification Selectable data table con trol operation Outputs the pulses from the specified channel accord ing to the data table specified by S Pulse output Linear inter polation Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so
218. fication of center position Designate target position E and center position Q of the circle to be drawn for the current position P Point E Point E Point P Point S Point S Point O Stop mode and continue mode Stop mode This mode stops the action at the target position set by execution of the circular interpolation instruction Designate this mode when the position specification for circular interpolation control is one set Designate this mode after circular interpolation control when stopping or entering the next control such as linear interpolation control Continue mode During circular interpolation instruction execution and before reaching the set target value this mode causes the circular interpolation action to continue when the next target position is set Designate this mode when you want to perform the circular interpolation action continuously 7 48 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function Specification of rotation direction Designate the rotation direction with a control code in a user program Verify the axial positional relationship and the relationship with the rotation direction that will be actually used Specification of rotation direction From CHO CW axis to CH2 CW direction control code rotation direction specification is 1 From CH2 CW axis to CHO CW direction control code rotation direction specification is 0 Example a Example b Y E
219. flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Data received from A B T D E TX F G external device S STX x Cannot be Reception code is stored when deleted by F159 Reception on reception MTRN done flag done flag is on R9038 or R9048 off Reception done flag 2 is turned off by exe FI d MTRN cuting F159 MTRN instruction execution off Stored y Y 10 DG G H buffer B B B BE E E E E E C cm Number of lt gt 2 lt 3 gt 0 lt gt 2 2 0 lt gt 0 lt gt lt gt reception bytes Number of bytes Number of bytes Number of bytes received is cleared received is cleared received is cleared lt Write pointer when the header is when F159 MTRN when the header is received is executed received The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order When the header is received the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address Reception is disabled while the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on Also when F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received i
220. flag R904F turns off after instruction execution when the next instruction executes Also it turns off during execution in an interrupt program 7 50 FP 7 4 Pulse Output Function Flag movement when command running Action when the execution conditions turns OFF Execution condintion FF Start Target value match Target value match Continuation date start Execution condition R903A R903C H H R904E R904F 1 scan 1 scan Differing from other pulse output instructions circular interpolation instruction F176 executes the execution conditions as continually ON Circular interpolation instruction F176 stops pulse output when the execution conditions turn OFF 0527 Notes e Right when the execution condition turn off positioning instructions F171 to F176 other than the currently running instruction F176 cannot be started up when the target value has not been reached e When restarting use pulse output control instruction FO below to reset the pulse output instruction This operation resets the Control flag for circular interpolation R904E I DB F0 MV H8 DT90052 Clear FO MV HO DT90052 FO MV H2008 DT90052 CH2 Clear FO MV H2000 DT90052 To reset control flags using FPWIN Pro refer to the programming example in section 7 4 6 1 for instance 7 51 FP 7 4 Pulse Output Function About composite speed setting The maximum composite sp
221. for each device Momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 4 ms the FPX continues to operate If the power is off for 4 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset 6 2 FP 6 1 Safety Instructions Protection of power supply An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used FPO PSA2 or FP PS24 050 The power supply for the control unit is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse Protection of output sections If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally 6 3 FP 6 2 Wiring of Power Supply 6 2 Wiring of Power Suppl Use the power supply cable part no AFP0581 that comes with the unit to connect the power supply Power supply cable AFP0581 Green Brown Function earth Frame ground GR Power supply Blue 0 V cable Rated voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC
222. gisters 400 and 401 to High speed counter HSC not used FPWIN Pro Do not use high speed counter FPWIN GR 7 5 1 PWM Output Instruction F173 While X6 MotorSwitch is in the ON state a pulse with a period of 502 5ms and duty ratio of 50 is output from YO of the specified channel CH2 When the program is run the data table will be as shown below Data table DT100 Control code 1 K1 Duty 2 50 1 Specify the control code by setting the K constant Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100 Frequency Ae um z ms 2 Specification of duty specify using K constant If the control code is KO to K19 the duty is KO to K999 0 096 to 99 996 If the control code is K20 to K24 the duty is KO to K990 0 to 99 Values are specified in units of 196 K10 digits behind the decimal point are rounded off 7 102 FP 7 5 PWM Output Function se Note If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output If written when instruction execution is started an operation error is occured FPWIN GR 6 MV K1 DT100 FO MV K500 DT101 F173 PWMH DT100 FPWIN Pro GVL Class Identifier Matsushit IEC Addre Type 3 Initial ET 8l VAR GLOBAL MotorSwitch 1X6 21 06 BOOL POU Header
223. goes off when elapsed value of high speed counter CHO reaches 5 000 pulses 90044 _ F167 HC1R KO K 5000 YO When elapsed value reaches 5 000 UU LU YO goes off R101 YO rp em S Set the inverter operation signal YO Y1 2 4 22 5 Set the inverter high speed signal Y1 R100 p ED c cT E61 DCMP 4500 DT90044 32 bit data comparison instruction R900C turns on when the CHO high speed counter elapsed value becomes greater than 4500 pulses R100 R900C R102 eae Ud a Speed reduction point reached R102 Y1 uM H DF y R Reset the inverter high speed signal Y1 R903A R100 TO R103 HDF Positioning done pulse 0 5 s 12 24 TMX 0 K5 0 1 s type timer Setting K5 and using it as a 0 5 s timer FPX 7 3 High Speed Counter Function FPWIN Pro GVL PO G var GLOBAL H operationstat x Activates operaiion High speed counter channel Oflag EVAR EXTERNAL 3 operstionstart FjeooL FALSE Operation start signal _ Inverter operation signal VAR_EXTERNAL HSCChOFlag High speed counter ee else ocn NE MAR EXTERNAL Inverter Hi Spend Inverter signal VAR Pos Oper Running Positioning operation VAR Pos Oper Done i HSCTartVal2 Buc ERU oco BIB s T Orura BUR DRE DONE NN JES VAR 3i TP PosOperDone
224. h time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous address At the beginning of a scan the address is 0 Monitor the ad dress using decimal display DT90019 2 5ms ring counter The data stored here is increased by one MW5 90019 every 2 5ms HO to HFFFF Difference between the values of the two points absolute value x 2 5ms elapsed time between the two points DT90020 Not used MW5 90020 DT90021 Not used 96MW5 90021 DT90022 Scan time current value The current scan time is stored here The 96MW5 90022 see note scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1ms Example K50 indicates 5ms B 21 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC DT90023 5 90023 Scan time minimum value see note A Available N A Not available Description The minimum scan time is stored here The scan time is calculated using the for mula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1ms Example K50 indicates 5ms DT90024 96e MW5 90024 DT90025 5 90025 Scan time maximum value see note Mask condition monitoring register for interrupts INT 0 to 7 The maximum scan time is stored here The scan time is calculated using the for mula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1ms Example K125 indicates 12 5ms The mask conditions of interrupts using the instruction can be s
225. he 1 channel RS485 type communication cassette Computer Communication is possible with up to 99 units FPX FPX No 1 No 2 No 3 No 99 Commercial adapter RS485 Sharing data among multiple PLCs using the PLC link function Using the 1 channel RS485 type communication cassette Data can be shared among up to 16 FPX units using the PLC link function 1 1 3 Positioning Control A high speed counter and a pulse output function are provided as standard features The pulse output function supports frequencies of up to 100 kHz which allows positioning control using a stepping or a servo motor Measurement using high speed counter Increment input mode decrement input mode 2 phase input mode individual input mode and direction discrimination mode are supported Single phase max 50 kHz two phase max 20 kHz Encoder Pulse input Encoder Pulse input 5 FP x 1 1 Main Features Positioning control based on pulse output Pulse direction and clockwise counter clockwise output are supported 1 channel max 100 kHz 2 max 60 kHz FPS Pulse output JUUUL Motor driver Pulse output Motor driver 1 1 4 Analog Control An analog potentiometer volume dial is provided as a standard feature It can be used in applications such as analog timers and does not requi
226. he communication format to match an external device connected to the COM port enter the settings for the various items No 415 baud rate The default baud rate for the various ports is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port click on z and select one of the values from 2400 to 115200 bps The two ports of the communication cassette can be used independently They can be set to computer link mode or general purpose serial communication 9 8 FP 9 2 Connection Examples 9 2 Connection Examples The following examples demonstrate how the PLC can be connected to an external device via a 1 1 computer link connection 9 2 1 1 1 Communication With Computer For a 1 1 computer link between the FPX and a computer an RS232C cable is needed Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC Computer ommand message Hesponse message RS232C Communication cassette The following types of communication cassettes can be used for 1 1 computer link communication Description This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a FPX communication cassette five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 1 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication RS CS control is possible FPG COM1 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a FPX communication
227. he value can be read by executing the F1 DMV instruction DT90208 to DT90218 5 90208 to 5 90218 Not used B 32 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC Name A Available N A Not available Description Reading Writing DT90219 5 90219 Unit no station no selection for DT90220 to DT90251 0 Unit no station no 1 to 8 1 Unit no station no 9 to 16 DT90220 5 90220 DT90221 5 90221 DT90222 5 90222 DT90223 MW5 90223 PLC link unit station System regis ter 40 and 41 no 1 or 9 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90224 5 90224 0790225 MW5 90225 DT90226 MW5 90226 DT90227 5 90227 PLC link unit station System regis ter 40 and 41 no 2 or 10 2 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90228 9e MW5 90228 DT90229 96 MW5 90229 DT90230 96 MW5 90230 DT90231 96 MW5 90231 PLC link unit station System regis ter 40 and 41 no 3 or 11 System regis ter 42 and 43 System regis ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90232 5 90232 0790233 5 90233 0790234 5 90234 0790235 5 90235 PLC link unit station System regis ter 40 and 41
228. hing with the programming tool the position of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ Verify the mode with the status indicator LED Otherwise restart the and change the mode of operation using the RUN PROG mode Switch 38 Communication status LEDs Display the communication status of the COM 1 and COM 2 ports LED and communication status Transmitted data Flashes while data is being transmitted monitor Goes out when no data is being transmitted Received data Flashes while data is being received monitor Goes out when no data is being received Transmitted data Flashes while data is being transmitted monitor Always on for RS232C 1 channel type Goes out when no data is being transmitted Received data Flashes while data is being received If RS and CS terminals connected monitor on when RS232C 1 channel type is in use Goes out when no data is being received 4 Tool port RS232C Used to connect a programming tool 5 Input connector 10 pins x 2 6 Input indicator LEDs 7 Output connector 10 pins x 2 2 3 FP 2 1 Parts and Functions Output indicator LEDs 9 Analog potentiometer analog dial excluding units with thermistor input function Turning this dial changes the values of special data registers DT90040 and DT90041 within the range of KO to K1000 The dial can be used for analog timers and other applications Power supply connector
229. i condition Off Off PROG mode Stop Flashes Off Forcing on off in Run Continue mode Abnormal Off Flashes A self diagnostic error Continue condition occurred Off Flashes A self diagnostic error Stop occurred On System watchdog timer Stop has been activated 13 1 2 Operation on Error Normally when an error occurs operation stops The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped when certain errors occur by setting the system registers Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 Option PLC Configuration 13 2 FP 13 1 Self Diagnostic Function 2 Select Act on Error tab Configuration p08p FP Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 Double click PLC in the project navigator 2 Double click System Register 3 Double click Act on Error Specify for the following errors whether operation shall be stopped or continued I O verification error operation error battery error iEnable Fixed i Specifies the operation when H Stop Continue Specifies the operation when an verify error happens Specifies the operation when an eration error is detected forking without back up batter error LED switch on if functi M Example 1 Allowing duplicated output Turn off the check box for no 20 When operation is resumed it will not be handled as an error M Example 2 Continuing operation even th
230. ify the area to be held when a battery is used Operation mode settings for errors system registers 4 20 23 and 26 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output verification error and operation error occur Time settings system registers 31 to 34 Set time out error detection time and constant scan time MEWNET WO PLC link settings system registers 40 to 45 and 47 These settings are for using link relays and link registers in MEWNET WO PLC link communication Note that PLC link is not the default setting Input settings system register 400 to 403 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used for the function Tool and COM port communication settings system registers 410 to 419 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM1 and ports are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PLC link and modem communication Note that the default setting is computer link mode B 6 FPS B 3 System Registers B 3 3 Checking and Changing System Registers Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 2 3 4 Set the control unit in the PROG mode Option gt PLC Configuration When the function for which settings are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To
231. in all p Ms characters following the fixed formula for the particular command 96 TT tL Specification and data to be written Command code ASCII code H23 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC should be created so that it targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically The parity check can be skipped by entering ASCII code H2A2A instead of the BCC 5 Terminator end code Messages must always end with a Cp ASCII code HOD 587 Notes e The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command e If there is a large number of characters to be written they may be divided and sent as several commands If there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded they may be divided and several responses sent Response message The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer 1 Header 2 Unit no of source PLC that processed the command decimal Check code BCC Hexadecimal Terminator esr Two One digit digit Text Processing results and communicati
232. in the BCD format This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time BCD and the R900B flag special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier Type Initial Press VAR CurrentTime d io 1 OU SpecDT_ToAny16 UNOSI CurrenTi meRegis Offs Any16 L CurrentTi me apiid K Wok wor i auum 0 CurrentTi me IN Q P Time ShouldBe THs Instead of using the TP instruction you can incorporate RA ti mer 2 12 11 FP 12 3 Clock Calendar Function 12 12 Chapter 13 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FP 13 1 Self Diagnostic Function 13 1 Self Diagnostic Function The control unit has a self diagnostic function which identifies errors and stops operation if necessary 13 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition When an error occurs the status of the status indicator LEDs on the control unit changes as shown in the table below Status ES 7 X8 F indicator KH H LEDs zi 00000000 00000000 5 Oo ROV YO7 Y amp F Status indicator LEDs on control unit LED status Description Operation status ERROR ALARM Normal On Off Normal operation Continue it
233. inked PLCs is not possible 11 14 FP 11 4 Connection Example 11 4 Connection Example The following example demonstrates how the PLC can be connected to two other FPX PLCs using a PLC link connection In the example shown here link relays are used When X4 of control unit no 1 turns on Y1 of unit no 2 turns on When X of unit no 1 turns on Y1 of unit no 3 turns on Link relay LO turns on Link relay L1 turns on FPX RS485 gt FPX Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Communication cassette The following communication cassette can be used with the PLC link function This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a two FPX communication cassette 1 channel RS485 type wire RS485 port It supports 1 N computer links C NET FPG COMS3 general purpose serial communication and a PLC link System register settings When using a PLC link the transmission format and baud rate are fixed see page 11 4 Set communication mode and unit numbers using the system registers e Settings for unit no 1 No 410 COM port 1 unit no 1 No 412 COM port 1 selection of communication mode PC link e Settings for unit no 2 No 410 COM port 1 unit no 2 No 412 COM port 1 selection of communication mode PC link e Settings for unit no 3 No 410 COM port 1 unit no 3 No 412 COM port 1 selection of communication mode PC link 11 15 FP 11 4 Conne
234. input only ON OFF Same as above Operating mode indicator 0527 Notes LED display e through X7 are inputs for the high speed counter and have a fast response time If used as normal inputs we recommend inserting a timer in the ladder program as chattering and noise may be interpreted as an input signal e The above specifications apply when the rated input voltage is 24 VDC and the temperature is 25 C 70 F 2 6 FP gt 2 2 Input Specifications Limitations on the number of input points which are simultaneously ON Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the temperature C32 C28 at 24 V DC at 24 V DC 16 16 J Number of at26 4VDC Number of at 26 4 V DC points per 4 points per common common which are si which are si 8 multaneous multaneous ON ON 257 52 55 42 47 55 114 8 125 6 131 0 107 6 116 6 131 0 Ambient temperature C F Ambient temperature C F C24 16 at 24 V DC Number of at 26 4 V DC points 42 common which are si 9 multaneous ON 46 487 55 114 8 118 4 131 0 Ambient temperature C F Internal circuit diagram XO X1 X3 X4 M Internal circuit X2 X5 to M R1 Xn 8 R2 COM For X2 and X5 to X7 R1 5 6 R2 1 For X8 to XF R1 6 8 R2 820 Q 2 7 FP gt 2 3 Output
235. ions running Positioning operations start 100 R101 Ey R101 90044 F167 HC1R_KO K 5000 YO Sets high speed counter CHO When elapsed value reaches 5 000 YO goes off Resets elapsed value of high speed counter CHO AU L Target value match OFF instruction YO goes off when elapsed value of high speed counter CHO reaches 5 000 pulses Set the inverter operation signal YO Positioning done pulse 0 5 s R102 TMX 0 K5 0 1 s type timer Setting K5 and using it as a 0 5 s timer FPWIN Pro GVL Identifier Address Operation Start OOL fFALSE iX i Activates operation GLOBAL 1 VAR_GLOBAL High speed counter t channel flag i POU Header Identifier Comment Operation Start Operation start signal EXTERNAL 1 VAR_EXTERNAL SCChHOFlag High speed counter Ch control flag os Oper Running High speed counter target walue S_PosOper Done FPX 7 3 High Speed Counter Function LD Body svep svg bwan hh HSCChOFIag Pos Oper Running PosOperRunning Channel No HSCTargetvalue to n e n n n s PosOperDone PosOperRunning HSGChOFlag gt dE GC MIC WS N PosOperDone THO
236. is used especially important safety instructions are given If they are not adhered to the results could be e personal injury and or e significant damage to instruments or their contents e g data se Note Contains important additional information or indicates that you should proceed with caution Example Contains an illustrative example of the previous text section viii Table of Contents Chapter1 Overview 1 2 1 141 Powerful Control Capabilities 1 2 1 1 2 A Full Range of Communication Functions 1 2 Positioning LOW max gd 1 3 114 CONVOI 1 4 LE UND DER e AI ORA HEIC EE 1 5 1 2 1 NU cx cep rii 1 5 1 22 FPE Expansi n 1 5 123 UNESP PPS FPE ede de E pecuaria 1 5 124 Communication Cassette 1 5 1 8 Restrictions on Unit 1 6 1 3 1 Restrictions on FPO Expansion Units 1 6 1 3 2 4 Restrictions on the Number of FPX Expansion Units 1 7 14 FPiogmnming TOOS 1 8 Chapter2 Parts and Specifications Al PONS 2 2 21 Tnol Pon Specifications 2 5 2 1 2 Communication
237. isters as shown below DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DTO Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte 0 0 4 R 44 6 D R 1 0 76 Value of DTO in the PLC on the other end DT7 DT6 DT5 Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower byte byte byte byte byte byte F 6 0 0 8 uu gt Value of DT1 in the PLC on the other end 10 30 FP 10 3 Connection Examples Extracting the data register values from the PLC on the other end In the program the data segment of the response from the PLC on the other end is converted to hexadecimal data using the F72 AHEX hexadecimal ASCII hexadecimal data conversion instruction and stored in DT50 and DT51 only if the character string 1 stored in DT1 is detected as a comparison instruction DT6 DT5 DT4 073 Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte 0 0 8 C 0 0 4 6 Value of DT1 in the PLC on the other end Value of DTO in the PLC on the other end Hexadecimal ASCII HEX conversion instruction F72 DT51 DT50 Upper Lower Upper Lower byte byte byte byte K200 K100 Value of DT1 in the Value of DTO in the PLC PLC on the other on the other end If an error occurs 01 00 is returned as the response OO is the error code and is the BCC 10 31 FP 10 4 Data Fo
238. it are connected internally Output connector roa are front view e The two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally e The two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally FP 2 4 Terminal Layout Diagrams 2 4 3 C24R2 Control Unit Input connector X0 X8 60 4 8 X Loo o X2 XA 4 E XB Loo 0 X4 XC 6 64 X5 XD oo4 0 X6 XE o om E E o Oo X7 oo COM COM Connector front view se Note The two COM terminals of the input circuit are not connected internally Output connector YO D LE D ag D D D COM Power Connector front view 2 13 FPS 2 4 Terminal Layout Diagrams Chapter 3 Expansion FP 3 1 Types of Expansion Units 3 1 Types of Expansion Units Expansion units power supply units and intelligent units from the FPO series as well as dedicated FPX expansion and intelligent units can be connected to the control unit Expansion units from the FPO series are connected on the right side of the control unit just as they are with the FPO Dedicated expansion units for the FPX are connected to the left side of the control unit Expansion on left side of contro
239. it data division 1 S2 D 51 S2 quotient D remainder DT90015 32 bit data division 51 S2 D S144 1 52 1 S2 quotient 0 1 D remainder DT90016 DT90015 16 bit data multiplication result in one word 1 S2 D 51 x S2 D 16 bit data increment D 1 D 32 bit data increment D 1 D 1 D 1 D 16 bit data decrement D 1 D 32 bit data decrement 0 1 D 1 0 1 D 32 bit data multiplication result in two words 51 S2 D 8141 81 x S241 S2 0 1 D B 45 FP B 7 Table of Instructions No Name Boolean Operand Description BCD arithmetic instructions 4 digit BCD D S D data addition 8 digit BCD 0 1 D S41 SI 0 1 D data addition 4 digit BCD 52 51 S2 D data addition Destination setting 8 digit BCD 52 S141 1 S2 1 S2 0 1 D data addition Destination setting 4 digit BCD data S D subtraction 8 digit BCD data S D 0 1 D S41 S 0 1 D subtraction 4 digit BCD data 1 S2 D 51 S2 D subtraction Destination setting 8 digit BCD data S1 S2 D S141 1 S241 S2 0 1 D subtraction Destination setting 4 digit BCD data 1 2 0 S1 x S2 D 1 D multiplication 8 digit BCD data 1 52 0 1 1 51 x S241 S2 0 3 D 2
240. it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 Minimum value word data 16 bit 1 S2 D Searches for the minimum value in the word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 Minimum value double word data 32 bit Searches for the minimum value in the double word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to 51 is stored in D 2 Total and mean values word data 16 bit 1 S2 D The total value and the mean value of the word data with sign from the area selected with 1 to the 52 are stored in the D Total and mean values double word data 32 bit 1 S2 D The total value and the mean value of the double word data with sign from the area selected with S1 to S2 are stored in the D Sort word data 16 bit 1 S2 S8 The word data with sign from the area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Sort double word data 32 bit 1 S2 S8 The double word data with sign from the area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Scaling of 16 bit data 1 2 D The output value
241. ition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Weight control unit FPG C32 C28 Approx 120 g 4 24 oz FPG C24 Approx 140 g 4 94 oz FPX expansion unit FPG XY64D2T Approx 100 g 3 53 oz FPG PP11 PP12 PP21 PP22 Approx 105 g 3 70 oz FPG EM1 Approx 80 g 2 82 oz A 2 FPS A 1 General Specifications FPO expansion unit Approx 65 g 2 29 oz Part No Weight FPO E8X FPO E8R E8YR Approx 90 9 3 17 oz FPO E8YT E8YP Approx 65 g 2 29 oz FPO E16R Approx 105 g 3 70 oz FPO E16T E16P E16X E16YT E16YP Approx 70 g 2 47 oz 2 2 Approx 85 g 3 00 oz FPO AD21 AD8 Approx 90 9 3 17 oz 4 Approx 85 g 3 00 oz FPO TC8 Current consumption Unit type FP con trol unit FPG C32C28 Control unit The current con sumed by the control unit pow er supply connec tor If expansion units or intelli gent units are added the cur rent is increased by the value indi cated below 90 mA or less Expansion unit The current con sumed by the ex pansion unit pow er supply connec tor If a unit is not listed below it means that it has no power supply connector Approx 95 g 3 35 oz Input circuit The current con sumed by the in put circuits of the various units The value indicates the current that flows into the in put circuit in dicates the num ber of points that
242. its in 17 bit area consisting of D plus the carry flag R9009 data to the right 16 bit data left rotation with carry flag data an Rotate the n bits in 17 bit area consisting of D plus the carry flag R9009 data to the left 32 bit data right rotation Rotate the number of bits specified by of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right 32 bit data left rotation Rotate the number of bits specified by of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left 32 bit data right rotation with carry flag data Rotate the number of bits specified by of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right together with carry flag R9009 data 32 bit data left rotation with carry flag data 16 bit data bit set Rotate the number of bits specified by of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left together with carry flag R9009 data Set the value of bit position n of the data of D to 1 16 bit data bit reset Set the value of bit position n of the data of D to 0 16 bit data bit invert Invert the value of bit position of the data of 16 bit data bit test Test the value of bit position of the data of and output the result to R900B Number of on 1 bits in 16 bit da
243. k and fixed interval interrupt functions are not used 7 7 FP 7 2 Function Specifications and Restrictions 7 2 3 Booting Time The booting time is the time span from the execution of the instruction to the actual pulse output Type of instruction Booting time Pulse output instruction F171 SPDH If CW CCW is set approx 200us with 30 steps Trapezoidal control home return approx 400us with 60 steps If pulse direction is set approx 500us with 30 steps see note approx 700us with 60 steps see note Pulse output instruction F172 PLSH If CW CCW is set approx 20 us JOG operation If pulse direction is set approx 320 us see note Pulse output instruction F174 SPOH If CW CCW is set approx 30 us Data table control If pulse direction is set approx 330 us see note PWM output instruction F173 PWMH Approx 30 us 0527 Note If pulse direction is set a waiting time approx 300 us is included from the time that the direction output goes on until the pulse output instruction can be executed 7 8 FP 7 3 High Speed Counter Function 7 3 High Speed Counter Function The high speed counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value turns on and off the desired output To turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match ON instruction F166 HC1S To turn off an output use the target value match OFF instruction F167 HC1
244. k mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Unit no Turns on when unit no 7 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Turns on when unit no 8 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error is occurs or when not in PLC link mode Unit no Turns on when unit no 9 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Unit no Turns on when unit no 10 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Turns on when unit no 11 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Unit no Turns on when unit no 12 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Unit no Turns on when unit no 13 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode Turns on when unit no 14 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in PLC link mode
245. k the noise conditions Interrupt error 2 An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to noise is possible Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no interrupt program for an interrupt which occurred Check the number of the interrupt program and change it to agree with the interrupt request status error Stops A faulty unit is installed Replace the unit with a new one Position of abnormal unit Stops An error in an I O unit occurred Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and locate the faulty FP expansion unit Then check the unit Intelligent unit error Stops An error in an intelligent unit occurred Check the contents of special data register DT90006 and locate the faulty FP intelligent unit I O unit verify error Selectable The connection condition of an I O unit has changed compared to that atthe time of power up Check the contents of special data register DT90010 FPO expansion I O unit DT90011 FP expansion I O unit and locate the faulty I O unit Set the operation status using system register 23 to continue operation Operation error Selectable Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed The causes of calculation errors vary depending on the instruction Set the operation status using system register 26 to continue operation Batte
246. l 5 9 5 55 so 8 B Ef 2 os EH oo oo oo oo oo oo 3 51 8 8 8 foo oS B B B on E E al Bal Ohmi HiH go HIS HI alte fog 28 1 8 B B B B 2B zB 8 8 8 aS 8 8 5 o i CAE Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion unit 4 unit 3 unit 2 unit 1 unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 Max expansion 4 units Max expansion 3 units 4 1 1 Numbers Since the input relay X and the output relay Y are handled in units of 16 points I O numbers are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below X Decimal 422 250 Hexadecimal Tp 2538 cc 9 5 Example Specifying Y numbers With the FP and the FPO the same numbers are used for input and output For example 20 can be used for both input X20 and output Y20 4 2 FP 4 2 Allocation for Units 4 2 Allocation for Units The tables below show the I O numbers for FPX control and expansion units 4 2 1 FP Control Unit The I O allocation of the FP control unit is fixed Type of control unit number FPG C32T FPG C32TTM Input 16 points to XF FPG
247. l unit Expansion on right side of control unit Dedicated FP FPO expansion unit expansion unit Max expansion 4 units Max expansion 3 units Control unit 3 2 FPX 3 2 Adding FPO Units 3 2 Adding FPO Units The FPO expansion 1 0 units or intelligent units are connected to the right side of the control unit Because unit expansion is done using the right side connector for FPO expansion and the expansion hooks on the side of the unit no expansion cable is needed Procedure 1 Peel seal on right side of control unit to expose internal expansion connector Attach expansion unit to control unit Press down expansion hooks You can now add up to two more units in the same manner 3 3 FP 3 3 Adding FPX Expansion Units 3 3 Adding FP Expansion Units The dedicated expansion and intelligent units for the FPX are connected to the left side of the control unit Because unit expansion is done using the left side connector for FP expansion and the expansion hooks on the side of the unit no expansion cable is needed Procedure 1 Remove cover on left side of unit so that internal left side connector for FP expansion is exposed 2 Raise expansion hooks on top and bottom of control unit Attach expansion unit to control unit 5 Press down expansion hooks You can now add up to three more units in the
248. llowing items should be observed taking care not to cut or disconnect the wiring 0527 Notes Procedure When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Do not twist the wires to connect them Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the terminal block socket construction if the wire is fastened upon counter clockwise rotation of the screw the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire CORRECT INCORRECT Clockwise Counter clockwise Remove 7 mm 0 276 in of the wire s insulation 7mm Insert wire into terminal hole until it stops Tighten screw clockwise to fix wire in place FPX 8 5 Cables 8 5 Cables Please use the following cables for systems using RS485 type communication cassettes Appropriate Electrical Cables standard wires Cross sectional view Conductor Insulator Sample Appropri ate Cable Size Resist Material ance at 20 C Shielded 1 25 mm Max Polyethyl Belden 9860 twisted pair AWG16 16 8Q km ene Hitachi Cable or greater Ltd KPEV 1 25 mm x Shield Cover E Con ductor Insulator 0 5 mm Max Polyethyl Belden 9207 AWG20 33 4O km ene Hitachi Cable or greater Ltd KPEV S0 5 mm x 1P Cover 0 75 mm Max polychlo VCTF 0 75
249. lue reaches 10 000 and pulse output stops R903A R903C goes off Positioning data table Control code 1 H 1200 Frequency 1 2 1000 Hz Target value 1 3 1000 pulses Frequency 2 2500 Hz Target value 2 2000 pulses Frequency 3 5000 Hz Target value 3 5000 pulses Frequency 4 1000 Hz Target value 4 2000 pulses Pulse output stop setting KO 7 40 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function 1 Control code H constant Upper word 0 Fixed Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 60 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Position control mode 0 Incremental Specifies the amount of travel number of pulses 1 Absolute Specifies the target value absolute value Output method 0 CW 1 CCW 2 Pulse and direction 3 Pulse and direction 4 Pulse and direction 5 Pulse and direction forward off reverse on forward on reverse off pn QU EN incremental counting decremental counting incremental counting decremental counting incremental counting decremental counting 2 Frequency Hz K constant 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set 1 to specify 1 5 Hz 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 191 Hz to 100 kH
250. meters calculated due to instruction execution are stored User setting area for cir DT60 to DT61 Control code Stop mode Absolute Center position setting method From CHO CW to CH2 CW direction cular inter polation DT62 to DT63 Composite speed 2000Hz DT64 to DT65 Target position X axis Target position P3 X axis 10000 DT66 to DT67 Target position Y axis Target position P3 Y axis 10000 DT68 to DT69 Center position X axis Center Position Q X axis 10000 DT70 to DT71 Center position Y axis Center position Q Y axis 5000 Work area DT72 to DT73 Sample program FPWIN GR See following pages Operation result storage area Parameters calculated due to instruction execution are stored 7 91 FP 7 4 Pulse Output Function R9010 Positioning data table F1 H1010 From P1 to P2 and from P3 to P4 Always Control code ON Ft K2000 DT2 Qontolcode Absolute niti Composite speed 2000Hz Composite speed nua Acceleration deceleration time 0 Ft DMV DT2 Composite speed Maximum F1 DMV DT6 R9010 Acceleration deceleration time TEE Positioning data table _F1 DMV H1010 DT40 From fo P1 Always Control code ON Control code F1 DMV DT2 42 Stop mode Pass position setting method Composite speed From CHO CW to CH2 CW dierction F1 DMV
251. n With Computer 9 2 2 1 1 Communication With Programmable Display GT10 GT30 9 3 1 N Communication 222222224 9 9 3 1 Setting System Registers and Unit Numbers 9 3 2 Connection with External Devices Chapter 10 General Purpose Serial Communication 10 1 Ae DETULIT MP 10 1 1 Outline of Operation 10 1 2 Programming Example 10 1 3 Setting Communication Parameters 10 2 Communication with External Devices 10 2 1 Sending Data to External Devices 10 2 2 Receiving Data from External Devices 10 2 2 1 Performing Repeated Reception of Data 10 3 Connection Examples bosses e Ede quest Ere news 10 3 1 1 1 Communication With Micro Imagechecker 10 3 2 1 1 Communication With FP Series PLC om ei qan prx tatto eee eee dir EAE 10 5 e RC eS SENS Xr Rr d ERR 10 6 Flag Operation in Serial Communication 10 6 1 Header No STX Terminator CR 10 6 2 Header STX Terminator ETX 10 7 Changing Communication Mode of COM Port 9 3 9 11 9 14 9 15 9 18 xiii FPS Table of Contents Chapter 11 PLC Link xi
252. nal area ENS 22 0 3 mm2 AWG 24 to 16 0 2 to 1 25 mm FP 6 7 Wiring the Terminal Block Pole terminals with compatible insulation sleeve If a pole terminal is being used the following models can be ordered from Phoenix Contact Manufacturer Cross sectional area mm Phoenix Contact AWG 24 Al 0 25 6YE AWG 20 Al 0 5 6WH AWG 18 Al 0 75 6GY AWG 18 Al 1 6RD AWG 20 for 2 pcs AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8WH Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co Part no CRIMPFOX UD6 Product number 1204436 When tightening the terminals of the terminal block use a screwdriver Phoenix Contact product no 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 Nm or less Wiring method Procedure 1 Remove part of wire insulation 7 mm 0 276 in Suitable wire 2 Insert wire into terminal block until it contacts back of socket 3 Tighten screw clockwise to fix wire in place Clockwise 6 15 FPS 6 7 Wiring the Terminal Block 6 16 Chapter 7 High Speed Counter and Pulse Output FPX 7 1 Overview 7 1 Overview The built in high speed counter offers three functions high speed counting pulse output and PWM pulse width modulation output High Speed Counter Function The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the c
253. nect connector and place battery so that battery terminal fits between the two tabs FPS 5 5 Backup Battery 3 Insert battery cover from above 5 5 2 Setting System Registers To use the backup battery for backup functions system registers 4 battery error alarm and 6 to 12 definition of hold areas need to be set se Notes Settings for registers 6 to 12 are only enabled when a backup battery is installed If no battery is installed use the initial values If the settings are changed whether the values are saved is undefined 5 5 2 1 Setting the Battery Error Alarm In the system register default settings item no 4 Battery error indication is set to Disable FPWIN GR No 4 Alarm Battery Error set to Off When using the battery set system register no 4 of the control unit so that the battery error alarm is turned on Procedure for FPWIN GR D Option PLC Configuration 2 Click Action on Error tab Configuration 08 High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port 1 Port COM2 Port Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold2 Action on Error Time Link No 20 Disable settinas for duplicated output PLE No 23 Stop when an 120 verification error occurs me Initialize No 26 Stop when an operation error occurs 3 Choose No 4 Alarm Battery Error FP 5 5 Backup Battery Procedure for FPWI
254. ngs for COM ports 1 and 2 No 410 for COM port 1 COM port unit no Enter a unit number from 1 to 99 pz System Register COM Port 410 419 T No tem Name 410 COM port 1 unit No To enable the unit number setting in FPWIN Pro or FPWIN GR set the unit number setting switch to 0 Unit numbers set using the unit number setting switch are valid only for the communication port of the communication cassette Tool port unit numbers should be set using the system registers With a C NET adapter a maximum of 32 units stations can be specified FP 9 3 1 N Communication 9 3 2 Connection with External Devices Connection diagram gt side 5 Transmission ine 1 rensmssnine2 9 To external device with RS485 port To external device with RS485 port With 1 N communication the various RS485 devices are connected using twisted pair cables The and signals of transmission line 1 and transmission line 2 are connected inside the communication cassette and either port may be used as COM port 1 Wiring should extend from one unit to the next Never run two wires from a single unit to two other units Correct wiring Incorrect wiring Setting of terminal station In the PLC that serves as the final unit terminal station the transmission line and the E terminal should be shorted To C NET adapter of computer connection Short th
255. nit number between 1 and 16 Unit number setting switch Selector switch Dial switch Unit number Dial switch position Selector Selector Switch off Switch on Not available NI oc A o N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B D E F 587 Notes e To enable the unit number setting in FPWIN Pro or FPWIN GR set the unit number setting switch to 0 If the station number setting switch has been set to 0 the system register settings and SYS1 instruction setting become valid e When using the PLC link function the maximum number of units is 16 e Station numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing station number the transmission time will be longer 11 7 FPS 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest station number in system register no 47 Station numbers can also be set using the SYS1 instruction The priority order for station number settings is as follows 1 station number setting switch 2 system registers 3 SYS1 instruction FPS 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters 11 2 3 Link Area Allocation The PLC link function is a function that involves all PLCs that have been booted in the MEW
256. nk 11 18 RUN PROG mode switch 2 3 5 Safety measures installation 5 2 wiring 6 2 Self diagnostic error 13 4 B 36 Self diagnostic function 13 2 Send area allocation 11 9 Send buffer general purpose serial communication 10 32 Serial communication specifications 1 1 communication 8 7 A 7 1 N communication 8 7 A 7 Short circuit protective circuit 6 10 Slim 30 type mounting plate 5 8 Special data registers B 20 Special internal relays B 13 FPS Index Specifications expansion unit 3 6 general 2 high speed counter A 6 input 2 6 output 2 8 performance A 4 PLC link A 8 pulse output A 6 PWM output A 6 serial communication 1 1 A 7 serial communication 1 N A 7 Start up sequence 6 2 Station number See Unit number Status indicator LEDs 2 3 troubleshooting 13 2 Syntax check error B 35 System registers B 6 setting B 7 table B 8 types B 6 T Terminal block wiring 6 14 Terminal layout diagram control units 2 11 expansion unit 3 8 Terminator general purpose serial communication 10 35 10 36 Tool port 2 5 Transistor output specifications 2 8 Transmission done flag 10 35 Transmission error 13 11 Trapezoidal control F171 programming example 7 30 Troubleshooting 13 4 Two phase input 7 9 Two wire type sensor 6 8 U Unit combinations 1 6 Unit
257. nk registers 128 0 to 128 Disable or enable setting for dupli cated output Yes FPWIN GR Disabled Fixed FPWIN GR Disabled Enabled Operation setting when an I O verification error occurs Stop Stop Continuation of operation Operation setting when an operation error occurs Stop Stop Continuation of operation Alarm Battery Error Operating setting when battery error occurs Disabled Disabled When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is not is sued and the ERROR ALARM LED does not light Enabled When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is issued and the ERROR ALARM LED lights Wait time setting for multi frame com munication 6500 0 ms 10 to 81900 ms Constant value settings for scan time 0 0 ms 0 Normal scan 0 to 350 ms Scans once each specified time interval Range of link relays used for PLC link 0 to 64 words Range of link data registers used for PLC link 0 to 128 words Starting number for link relay transmission 0 to 63 Link relay transmission size 0 to 64 words Starting number for link data register transmission Oto 127 Link data register transmission size 0 to 127 words Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO PLC link 1to 16 B 8 FP B 3 System Registers Default Descriptions value High speed counter operation mode CHO Do not set input XO as high
258. normal for on off OFF If transmission is stopped a problem has occurred or a PLC link is not being used Operation mode relays R9070 to R907F correspond to station no 1 to 16 The operation modes RUN PROG can be checked for any given PLC Relay no R9070 R9071 R9072 R9073 R9074 R9075 R9076 R9077 R9078 R9079 R907A R907B R907C R907D R907E R907F Station no 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 16 Conditions ON When the unit is in the RUN mode for on off OFF When the unit is in the PROG mode PLC link transmission error relay R9050 This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission Relay No R9050 Station No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 16 Conditions ON When a transmission error has occurred in the PLC link or when there is an error in the setting for for on off the PLC link area OFF When there are no transmission errors Tip Monitoring the PLC link status In FPWIN Pro the PLC link status items such as the transmission cycle time and the number of times that errors have occurred can be monitored by choosing Monitor gt PLC Link Status In FPWIN GR select the PLC link switch on the FPWIN GR Status Monitor screen se Note Remote programming of other l
259. nput Offs The variable input Any32 is thus copied to the data register DDT 9000 Offs or DDT 90000 Offs The output flag is not used Bares s E Any32 ToSpecDT Jr EN ENO EET EV New Any32 Flag SDT HSC CHO EY Offs M Programming example 2 Reading the elapsed value FPWIN GR X8 Reads the elapsed value of the H DF 1 DT90044 DT100 high speed counter to DT100 and DT101 FPWIN Pro GVL Class Identifier Matsushit Initial au Comment afar 4 GLOBAL Current i DDT8OO44 9 05 90044 i DINT 0 i i Address of elapsed value POU Header Class Identifier Type Initial Comment EZ EXTERNAL Current ress of elapsed value 1 VAR Outputs elapsed value LD Body 1 Read EV ZRS E MOVE one ine SEES EN ENO Current __EY Num Copied Alternatively to the E MOVE command the commands E SpecDT ToAny32 or F1 DMV can be used 7 60 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 5 Sample Programs The wiring diagram below applies to all programs in this section Input terminal Home sensor Near home sensor Positioning start Positioning start Home return start JOG start JOG start Overrun Output terminal Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Se Note 2 X3 X8
260. ns in 1 s cycles R901D 0 901 13 25 clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 2 s cycles R901E 0 901 14 1 min clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 1 min cycles R901F 0 901 15 Not used B 14 FPS B 4 of Special Internal Relays Relay No Matsushita IEC R9020 96 MX0 902 0 RUN mode flag Description Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN R9021 0 902 1 Not used R9022 MX0 902 2 Not used R9023 MX0 902 3 Not used R9024 MX0 902 4 Not used R9025 MX0 902 5 Not used R9026 MX0 902 6 Message flag Turns on while the F149 MSG instruction is executed R9027 MX0 902 7 Not used R9028 0 902 8 Not used R9029 MX0 902 9 Forcing flag Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay and timer counter contacts R902A 0 902 10 Interrupt enable flag Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL instruction R902B MX0 902 11 Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs R902C MX0 902 12 Not used R902D 0 902 13 Not used R902E 0 902 14 Not used R902F 0 902 15 Not used B 15 FPS B 4 of Special Internal Relays Relay No Mat
261. ns off when unit no 9 is in PROG mode R9079 Unit no Turns on when unit no 10 is in RUN mode 96MX0 907 9 Turns off when unit no 10 is in PROG mode R907A Unit no Turns on when unit no 11 is in RUN mode 0 907 10 Turns off when unit no 11 is in PROG mode R907B Unit no Turns on when unit no 12 is in RUN mode 0 907 11 Turns off when unit no 12 is in PROG mode R907C Unit no Turns on when unit no 13 is in RUN mode 0 907 12 Turns off when unit no 13 is in PROG mode R907D Unit no Turns on when unit no 14 is in RUN mode 0 907 13 Turns off when unit no 14 is in PROG mode R907E Unit no Turns on when unit no 15 is in RUN mode 96MX0 907 14 Turns off when unit no 15 is in PROG mode R907F Unit no Turns on when unit no 16 is in RUN mode 0 907 15 Turns off when unit no 16 is in PROG mode B 19 FPS B 5 of Special Data Registers B 5 Table of Special Data Registers The special data registers are one word 16 bit memory areas which store specific information Address Matsushita IEC DT90000 MW5 90000 Self diagnostic error code A Available N A Not available Description The self diagnostic error code is stored here when a self diagnostic error occurs Reading Writing DT90001 MW5 90001 Not used DT90002 5 90002 Position of abnormal unit for left side expansion When
262. nt 0 Enable 1 Disable Software reset 0 No 1 Yes Hour and minute data of the clock calendar are stored here This data is read only data it cannot be overwrit ten Higher byte Lower byte Hour data Minute data to H23 to H59 DT90054 5 90054 Clock calendar setting minute second DT90055 5 90055 Clock calendar setting day hour DT90056 5 90056 Clock calendar setting year month DT90057 5 90057 Clock calendar setting day of the week The year month day hour minute second and day of the week data for the calendar timer is stored The built in calendar timer will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The calendar timer can be set by writing a value using a programming tool soft ware or a program that uses the FO MV instruction see example for DT90058 Higher byte Lower byte DT90054 Second data 00 to H59 Hour data to H23 Minute data HOO to H59 Day data to H31 DT90055 DT90056 Month data H01 to H12 Day of the week data to Year data HOO to H99 DT90057 B 24 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC A Available N A Not available Description Reading Writing DT90058 5 90058 Clock calendar time setting and 30 seconds correction register
263. o DT90201 DT90203 Using linear interpolation max 100 kHz Using circular interpolation max 20 kHz e The pulse output function is only available with the transistor output type e Linear and circular interpolation control is only available with transistor output type control unit version 2 or higher PWM output function Related instructions High speed counter channel no Output contact number used Memory area used Output frequency duty Control flag If resolution 1000 1 5 Hz to 12 5 kHz 0 0 to 99 9 If resolution 100 15 6 kHz to 41 7 kHz FO MV F1 DMV F173 PWMH se Note 0 to 99 The PWM output function is only available with the transistor output type 7 5 FP 7 2 Function Specifications and Restrictions 7 2 2 Restrictions Restrictions on channels The same channel cannot be used by more than one function Channel High speed counter function Incremental input decremental input Two phase input incremental decre mental input incremental decre mental control input CHO CH2 Pulse output CHO function CH2 A Available Not Available Restrictions on I O allocations The inputs and outputs allocated to the various functions listed in the tables in the previous section see page 7 4 cannot be allocated to more than one function Except fo
264. o setting Default value 1 Descriptions 1 to 99 Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled Disabled Communication format setting Data length 8 bits Parity check with odd Stop bit 1 bit Enter the settings for the various items Data length 7bits 8bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1bit 2bits Communication speed Baud rate setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Unit no setting 1 0 to 99 Communication mode setting Computer link Computer link General purpose serial communication PLC link Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled Disabled Communication format setting Data length 8 bits Parity check with odd Stop bit 1 bit Enter the settings for the various items Data length 7bits 8bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1bit 2bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General pur pose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist Communication speed Baud rate setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data communication mode 0 to 32764 Note Buffer capacity setting for data received of general
265. of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC Name A Available N A Not available Description Reading Writing DT90200 5 90200 DT90201 5 90201 High speed counter elapsed value The elapsed value 82 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing the F1 DMV instruction A A DT90202 MW5 90202 DT90203 MW5 90203 High speed counter target value For CH2 The target value 82 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 F167 F171 F175 or F176 is executed The value can be read by executing the F1 DMV instruction DT90204 5 90204 DT90205 5 90205 DT90206 5 90206 DT90207 5 90207 High speed counter elapsed value High speed counter target value For CH3 The elapsed value 82 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing the F1 DMV instruction The target value 82 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 or F167 is ex ecuted T
266. of using variables no POU header is required LD Body 5 5 c6 25 225 ss 29014 751 PCLK1T41 100 s 5 SUA GONE oes d 58 Notes e The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same time should be set for all linked PLCs e Executing SYS1 does not change any of the system registers e The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the PLCs are connected to the link e If a short time has been set the transmission assurance relay may not function properly The shortest time that can be set is 100 ms e The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time does not cause any problems 11 21 FP 11 5 PLC Link Response Time 11 22 Chapter 12 Other Functions gt 12 1 Analog Potentiometer 12 1 Analog Potentiometer The FPZ is equipped with two analog potentiometers as a standard feature Turning the potentiometers changes the values of special data registers DT90040 and DT90041 within a range of KO to K1000 With this function it is possible to change internal time settings in the PLC without using the programming tool The analog values set with the potentiometers can be used in analog clocks and other applications
267. ol unit has the lowest I O numbers This is called the expansion unit 1 The next unit is the expansion unit 2 etc 00000000 00000000 00000000 The I O numbers this example apply to an FPG C32T or FPG C32T2 type control unit and an XY64D2T type FPX expansion unit FPX control unit XO to XF YO to YF FP expansion unit Y100 to Y11F X100 to X11 Expansion unit 1 Y180 to Y19 X180 to X19F Expansion unit 2 Y260 to Y27F X260 to 27 Expansion unit 3 Y340 to Y35F X340 to Expansion unit 4 4 4 FP 4 3 O Allocation for FPO Units 4 3 Allocation for Units The tables below show the I O numbers for FPO expansion analog I O A D conversion and I O link units I O numbers do not need to be set as allocation is performed automatically when a unit is added 4 3 1 FPO Expansion Unit The I O allocation of the expansion unit is determined by the installation location Type of expansion unit Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3 FPO E8X Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Input 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 FPO E8YR E8YT E8YP Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 FPO E8R FPO E16X Input 16 point
268. oltage Vg 3 times the load voltage Average rectified forward current Ig load current or more Diode FP 6 5 Output Wiring 6 5 2 Capacitive Loads When connecting loads with large in rush currents connect a protection circuit as shown below to minimize their effect Resistor Inductor Output 4 m Load Output 5 W Load terminal terminal Ali FPX COM 9 COM FPX 6 6 Wiring the MIL Connector 6 6 Wiring the MIL Connector The following housings semi covers and pressure welders are supplied with the FPX control unit Use the wires indicated below Also use a pressure connection tool for connecting the wires Supplied connector AFP0807 Type and Product No Housing 10 pin type only Semi cover AXW61001 Welder contact AXW7221 Suitable wires Size Conductor cross sectional area Insulation thickness AWG 22 0 3 mm2 dia 1 5 to dia 1 1 AWG 24 0 2 mm2 Pressure connection tool Product No AXY52000 The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire s insulation saving labor Procedure 1 Break off contact from carrier 2 Insert wire into pressure connection tool 6 12 FP 6 6 Wiring the MIL Connector 3 Insert wire without removing its insulation until it stops Lightly grip tool Insert press fitted wire into conn
269. ommunication speed baud rate is fixed at 115 200 bps B 12 FPS B 4 of Special Internal Relays B 4 Table of Special Internal Relays The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions The ON and OFF states are not output externally Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction Relay No Matsushita IEC R9000 96 MX0 900 0 Self diagnostic error flag Description Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs The content of self diagnostic error is stored in DT90000 R9001 0 900 1 Not used R9002 MX0 900 2 Not used R9003 0 900 3 Not used R9004 MX0 900 4 verification error flag Turns on when an verification error occurs R9005 96 MX0 900 5 Backup battery error flag non hold Turns on for an instant when a backup battery error occurs R9006 96 MX0 900 6 Backup battery error flag hold Turns on and keeps the on state when a backup battery error oc curs Once a battery error has been detected this is held even after recovery has been made It goes off if the power supply is turned off or if the system is initialized R9007 96 MX0 900 7 Operation error flag hold Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error occurs The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 Indicates the first operation error which occurred R9008 96 MX0 900 8 Operation
270. on control flag R904E to verify completion of the circular interpolation action 7 90 FPS 7 4 Pulse Output Function Allocation of data registers User setting area for lin ear inter polation Data register number DTO to DT1 Description Control code Details Absolute DT2 to DT3 Startup speed 2000Hz DT4 to DT5 Target speed 2000Hz DT6 Acceleration decelera tion time Oms DT8 to DT9 Target position X axis 10000 Target position P2 X axis DT10 to DT11 Target position Y axis 0 0 Target position P4 X axis Target position P2 Y axis Target position P4 Y axis 10000 Work area for linear in terpolation DT12 to DT23 Operation result storage area Parameters calculated due to instruction execution are stored User setting area for cir cular inter polation DT40 to DT41 Control code Stop mode Absolute Pass position setting method From CHO CW to CH2 CW direction DT42 to DT43 Composite speed 2000Hz DT44 to DT45 Target position X axis Target position P1 X axis 0 DT46 to DT47 Target position Y axis Target position P1 Y axis 0 DT48 to DT49 Pass position X axis Pass position S X axis 5000 DT50 to DT51 Pass position Y axis Pass position S Y axis 5000 Work area DT52 to DT57 Operation result storage area Para
271. on error codes are stored here V aM value Processing results for contact area read contact is off name g read contact area Response code indicates a normal processing result indicates that an error occurred 9 4 FP 9 1 Overview 7 Header start code A 96 ASCII code H25 or lt ASCII code must be at the beginning of a message The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here In 1 1 communication 01 will be stored here S Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command The value should be read based on the content If the processing is not completed successfully an error code will be stored here so that the content of the error can be checked 01 RC 1 2 1 _ If the read command was used the data that was read is stored here If normal Command name If error occurs Error code Response code If normal ASCII code H24 If error occurs ASCII code H21 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text 5 Terminator end code There is always a ASCII code HOD at the end of the message 0527 No
272. on if 0 has been set using system register 34 B 13 FPS B 4 of Special Internal Relays Relay No Matsushita IEC R9010 MX0 901 0 Always on relay Description Always on R9011 MX0 901 1 Always off relay Always off R9012 MX0 901 2 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan R9013 0 901 3 Initial on type pulse relay Goes on for only the first scan after operation RUN has been started and goes off for the second and subsequent scans R9014 0 901 4 Initial off type pulse relay Goes off for only the first scan after operation RUN has been started and goes on for the second and subsequent scans R9015 MX0 901 5 Step ladder initial pulse relay on type Turns on for an instant only in the first scan of the process the mo ment the step ladder process is opened R9016 0 901 6 Not used R9017 0 901 7 Not used R9018 0 901 8 0 01 5 clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 01 s cycles R9019 MX0 901 9 0 02 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles R901A 0 901 10 0 1 clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles R901B 0 901 11 0 2 clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s cycles R901C 0 901 12 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operatio
273. on running Positioning operation start 7o e R21 DF y R21 Positioning data table MM DT 102 K300 211 Control code H11 00 Duty 1 4 2596 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental CW and CCW Fi Dmv K 8000 1 F1DMv Ko DT 110 LJ LOLO LOLL F171 SPDH DT 100 The data table headed by DT100 is used Pulses are output from CHO R903A R20 TO R22 HF R22 Pulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses are output from CHO Positioning done pulse 1 second 0 1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1 second timer TMX 0 K10 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro The GVL and DUT shown on page 7 62 apply to this program POU Header ositioning start signal igh speed counter control ag for CHO ositioning in progress A ontrol code 1641100 25 duty 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental Cw CCw i Initial Speed 1000 i Maxi mumSpeed 6000 i AccelTime 300 i Target Val 8000 _ iTP aou 5 RS PosOperDone PosOperStart gt HSC_ CHO Flag 5 2 e H ME o 447 Pos Progress DataTable1 Control Code
274. or more than one PLC on the same network Max 16 units ESS am qub RS485 The unit number is specified either by using the system register settings in the FPWIN Pro or FPWIN GR programming tool or the unit number setting switch on the side of the FP control unit Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid FPS 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters Setting unit numbers with the programming software To set unit numbers with the FPWIN Pro or FPWIN GR programming software follow the procedure below Procedure for FPWIN GR 1 2 Option gt PLC Configuration Configuration OTTO GTI 71 221 E No 410 Unit setting for COM port 1 Click on 1 select unit number from 1 to 16 Procedure for FPWIN Pro gt Double click PLC in the project navigator Double click System Register Double click COM Port Enter a unit number from 1 to 16 in system register no 410 for COM port 1 tem Name 410 COM port 1 unit No 1 B 11 6 FP 11 2 Setting Communication Parameters Setting unit numbers with the setting switch The unit number setting switch is located underneath the cover on the left side of the FP control unit The selector switch and the dial be used in combination to set a u
275. ough a calculation error has occurred Turn off the check box for no 26 Operation will be continued but will be handled as an error 13 3 FP 13 2 Troubleshooting 13 2 Troubleshooting In the event of an error follow the steps in the procedures below 13 2 1 ERROR ALARM LED is Flashing Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Check the error code using the programming tool Procedure for FPWIN GR With FPWIN GR ver 2 if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically Check the contents of the self diagnosed error Status Display Untitlel If the error is an operation Program Information rror th rror ri Program Size 1200011201 Rest 11994 Mi error mee add 958 Machine _ 0f 0K1 be confirmed in this File Reaister Size Of OK dialog box MO Comment Size 100000 Res 100000 P Click on Clear Error to Block Comment E 50001 Rest 5000 L 1 0 Error clear the error Remark Size z 5000P Rest 5000 P PLC Connection FP SIGMA 12K Station Home Verifi Version 1 01 ScanTime 1 0 msec Condition Normal Min 0 5 msec Benson En PLC Mode REMOTE PROG 1 0 msec PLC Error Flag PLC Mode Flag PC link Self 1 0 RUN Mode 0 OUTRefresh 0 Volt Dip 0 BatteyEr 0 TEST Mode 0 S
276. ount reaches the target value this function turns the desired output on or off Encoder output is input to FP X the high speed counter Roller Motor Encoder 0 Inverter START STOP signal Cutter blade control signal Tape lead wire Pulse Output Function Combined with a commercially available motor driver this function can be used for positioning control With an exclusive FP X instruction you can perform trapezoidal control home return and JOG operation Stepping motor t FP X Pulse output CW Servo motot Pulse output CCW Motor driver 1 Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW r g motor Servo motor PWM Output Function By using an exclusive FP instruction a pulse output of the desired duty ratio is possible with the PWM output function When you increase the pulse width Heating increases When you decrease it JL JL JL Heating decreases 7 2 FPX 7 1 Overview Performance There are four channels for the built in high speed counter The channel number allocated for the high speed counter will change depending on the function being used The counting range of the built in high speed counter is 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 coded 32 bit binary The high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the c
277. ounted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there Max value 2 147 483 647 2 147 483 646 2 147 483 645 2 147 483 646 2 147 483 647 Min value 2 147 483 648 LI C 1 0527 Note When the linear interpolation instruction F175 or the circular interpolation instruction F176 is used the value for the target value or the amount of travel should be set so that it is within the range of 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 24 bit binary with sign The F175 and F176 instructions can only be used with transistor output type control unit version 2 or higher 7 3 FP 7 2 Function Specifications and Restrictions 7 2 Function Specifications and Restrictions This section contains the specifications and restrictions of the functions using the high speed counter 7 2 1 Specifications High speed counter function Input output contact High Memory area being used Performance Related number being used speed specifications instruc Ed Control Elapsed Target Min Max tions nel 49 value value input counting On off Count Input output input contact mode number area area pulse speed see width note 1 see note 2 Specify Incre DT90044 DT90046 Using desired mental to to 1 channel output DT90045 DT90047 max
278. output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on off signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is OFF Pulse direction output method forward ON reverse OFF pem Forward e Reverse vof Ee es Se Rotation 1 on direction direction Incremental counting Decremental counting Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on off signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is ON FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 2 Allocation The I O allocation of pulse output terminals and home input is determined by the channel used For table of specifications see page 7 5 The near home input is allocated by designating the desired contact and turning on and off the specified bit of special data register DT90052 Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for CW CCW Set the control code for F171 SPDH to CW CCW Using CHO Using CH2 FPX Home input p x2 Home input X5 el Near home X6 input Driver input Driver YO CW output CW output YA CCW output CCW output X3 or any other input can be or
279. peed 100 i MaximumSpeed 2000 i AccelTime 150 iTargetVal 0 1 Home return CCW Start Operation arts preset operation _PosOperDone wre RS rStart usc CHO Flag 42584 2x enis P Pos_Progress Pos Oper Dome os UEM 5 Shs oes CPos Progress DataTable1 Control Code vie 5 s _PosOperBone RRS Pos_ Progress Flag 1 at Pos Oper Done NearHomeSensorin CH EnHome cou Operati on pa 7 74 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 5 5 Home Return Operation Plus Direction When XA HomeReturnStart turns on a pulse is output from CW output YO PulseOutCW of the specified channel CHO and the return to home begins When X3 NearHomeSensorln turns on deceleration begins and when X2 HomeSensorlnput turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to O YO is used implicitly by F171 SPDH 0 V 24 V DO Home return start Pulse output CW Home input Pulse output CCW Motor driver Near home sensor Home sensor Pulse output diagram Near home sensor Home sensor XA on X3 on X2 on 7 75 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN GR XA R903A R52 R
280. program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 Data is received from the RS232C device to the receive buffer 2 The reception done contact R9038 R9048 is turned 3 received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DTO 4 The F159 MTRN instruction is executed with no data FPWIN Pro n Number 0 FPWIN GR KO to reset the buffer writing point and to turn off the reception done contact R9038 9048 The system is now ready to receive the next data 10 15 FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices FPWIN Pro Global Variable List eLoBAL H ReceivedData _ 4 Target res POU Header ReceivedData 1 ReceivedData 4 ReceptionDone gt gt R9038 may change while a scan is being carried out To ensure proper execution of the program the status of the special internal relay should be copied to a variable at the beginning of the program 10 16 FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices 10 2 2 1 Performing Repeated Reception of Data For repeated reception of data perform the following steps 1 Receive data 2 Reception done R9038 R9048 on reception prohibited 3 Process received data 4 Execute F159 MTRN R9038 R9048 off reception possible 5 Receive subsequent data The reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns on when data reception from the external de
281. put is set to and held at Reset Output is set to and held at off Keep Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on No opera No operation tion B 38 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions Basic function instructions On delay timer TMa n Description After set value n x 0 001 seconds timer contact is set to on After set value x 0 01 seconds timer contact is set to on After set value x 0 1 seconds timer contact is set to on After set value n x 1 second timer contact a is set to on Auxiliary timer 16 bit H F137 STMR DH YRL After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output and R900D are set to on Auxiliary timer 32 bit H F183 DSTM S DH YRL After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output and R900D are set to on Counter Decrements from the preset value UP DOWN counter F118 UDC p F118 UDC 5 D Increments or decrements from the preset value S based on up down input Shift register Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal relay WR data to the left Left right shift register Control instructions Master control relay Master control relay end 119 LRSR4
282. r Example Correct to 0 seconds when turns ON FPWIN GR Correct to 0 I DF Fo MV 1 DT90058 FPWIN Pro 2222 1 _ Num 790058 Correct to 0 seconds At the time of correction if between and 29 seconds the time will be moved down and if between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the example above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes 0 seconds and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 seconds B 26 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC DT90059 5 90059 Serial communication error code A Available N A Not available Description Error code is stored here when a communication error occurs Reading Writing DT90060 5 90060 Step ladder process 0 to 15 DT90061 MW5 90061 Step ladder process 16 to 31 DT90062 5 90062 Step ladder cess 32 to 47 DT90063 5 90063 Step ladder pro cess 48 to 63 DT90064 5 90064 Step ladder cess 64 to 79 DT90065 5 90065 Step ladder pro cess 80 to 95 DT90066 MW5 90066 Step ladder pro cess 96 to 111 DT90067 5 90067 Step ladder cess 112 to 127 DT90068 MW5 90068 Step ladder pro cess 128 to 143 DT90069 5 90069 Step l
283. r that caused operation to stop has occurred Procedure 1 Check to see if the ERROR ALARM LED is flashing In this case see page 13 4 Procedure 2 Execute total check function to determine the location of the syntax error Refer to your software manual for details about the total check method 13 2 7 A Transmission Error has Occurred Procedure 1 Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two terminals and the two terminals of the units and that the final unit has been connected correctly Procedure 2 Check to see if the transmission cables are within the specifications range see page 8 11 Make sure all of the cables in the link are of the same type Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap 13 11 FP 13 2 Troubleshooting 13 12 Appendix A Specifications Dimensions FP A 1 General Specifications A 1 General Specifications Deep i Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Allowed momen C32 4ms at 21 6 V 7 ms at 24 V 10 msat 26 4 V tary power off time C28 C24 3msat21 6 V 5 ms at 24 V 8 ms at 26 4 V Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F Storage temperature 20 to 70 C 4 to 158 F Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH non condensing S
284. r the examples noted below inputs and outputs that have been allocated to the various functions cannot be used as normal inputs and outputs M Example 1 If no reset input is used in the high speed counter function X2 and X5 can be used as normal inputs 0 Example 2 If no output is used to clear the deviation counter in the pulse output function Y2 and Y5 can be used as normal outputs Restrictions on the execution of instructions When using the pulse output instructions F171 F172 F174 and F175 specify the initial frequency to 30 kHz or less Otherwise the first pulse may be lost If an instruction related to the high speed counter F166 to F176 is executed the control flag special internal relay R903A to R903D corresponding to the channel used turns on Please be aware that the control flag in progress may change while a scan is being carried out To prevent multiple read access to this special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program When the control flag for a channel turns on another instruction using that same channel cannot be executed Executing circular interpolation control instruction F176 sets the circular interpolation in progress flag special internal relay R904E and that state is maintained until the target value is achieved During this time other pulse output instructions F171 to F176 cannot be executed 7 6 FP gt 7 2 Function
285. ramming tool software can be used to write data B 28 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC Description A Available N A Not available Reading Writing DT90100 5 900100 Step ladder pro cess 640 to 655 DT90101 MW5 900101 Step ladder pro cess 656 to 671 DT90102 5 900102 Step ladder pro cess 672 to 687 DT90103 MW5 900103 Step ladder pro cess 688 to 703 DT90104 5 900104 Step ladder pro cess 704 to 719 DT90105 MW5 900105 Step ladder pro cess 720 to 735 DT90106 5 900106 Step ladder cess 736 to 751 DT90107 5 900107 Step ladder pro cess 752 to 767 DT90108 5 900108 Step ladder pro cess 768 to 783 DT90109 5 900109 Step ladder pro cess 784 to 799 DT90110 5 900110 Step ladder pro cess 800 to 815 DT90111 MW5 900111 Step ladder pro cess 816 to 831 DT90112 5 900112 Step ladder pro cess 832 to 847 DT90113 5 900113 Step ladder pro cess 848 to 863 DT90114 5 900114 Step ladder cess 864 to 879 DT90115 5 900115 DT90116 5 900116 Step ladder pro cess 880 to 895 Step ladder pro cess 896 to 911 DT90117 5 900117 Step ladder pro cess 912 to 927 DT90118 5 900118 Step ladder
286. re a programming tool An analog unit is also available as intelligent unit FP x 1 2 Unit Types 1 2 Unit Types The following units are available for the FP 1 2 1 FP Control Unit Number of I O points Part no 16 points transistor output 16 points NPN FPG CS32T 16 points transistor output 16 points NPN FPG CS32T2 16 points transistor output 12 points PNP FPG C28P2 control unit 16 points relay output 8 points FPG C24R2 FP control unit with 16 points transistor output 16 points NPN 2 thermistor input func 16 points transistor output 16 points NPN FPG CS32T2TM tion 16 points relay output 8 points FPG C24R2TM It is not possible to expand the FPG C32T or FPG C32TTM control unit with the FPX expansion unit These units are not currently available in Europe 1 2 2 FP gt Expansion Unit expansion unit Input 32 points transistor output 32 points NPN FPG XY64D2T Transistor output 1 axis type FPG PP11 Transistor output 2 axis type FPG PP21 Line driver output 1 axis type FPG PP12 Line driver output 2 axis type FPG PP22 FPZ positioning unit FPX expansion data memory unit It is not possible to expand the FPG CS32T or FPG C32TTM control unit with the FPX expansion unit These units are not currently available in Europe 256 k byte FPG EM1 1 2 3 Units for FPO and FP g
287. red in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 If this happens monitor the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error FP 13 2 Troubleshooting 13 2 2 ERROR ALARM LED is ON Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of the PLC has been stopped Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of the PLC from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on f the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on again there is probably an abnormality in the FPX control unit Please contact your dealer If the ERROR ALARM LED is blinking see page 13 4 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode f the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on the program execution time is too long Check e ifinstructions such as JP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan can never finish e that interrupt instructions are executed in succession 13 2 3 All LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Check the power supply wiring Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FPX control unit is in the range of the rating Be sure to check the fluctuation in the power supply Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP control unit is shared with them If the LEDs on the control unit turn on at this moment increase the capacity of the power supply or prepare another power supply for other devices FP 13 2 Troubleshooting
288. rget value greater than current value CW CCW Pulse output from CW Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is OFF Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Decremental HSC counting method Incremental Target value less than current value Home return Pulse output from CCW Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF Decremental When executing the F171 SPDH instruction the pulse is continuously output until the home input X2 or X5 is enabled To decelerate the movement when near the home position designate a near home input and set bit 4 of special data register DT90052 to off on off The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed JOG operation Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for the F172 PLSH instruction is in the ON state The direction output and output frequency are specified by the F172 PLSH instruction 7 29 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 4 Instructions The following instructions can be used with the pulse output function 7 4 4 1 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Trapezoidal Control This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table
289. rings containing more than 12 characters Therefore Adr Of VarOffs is recommended instead of F95 ASC Adr Of VarOffs I delivers 10 29 FP 10 3 Connection Examples only the text characters without the header characters 2 words For more information on the data type String please refer to the online help Buffer statuses The tables below show the statuses of the send and receive buffers when the sample program is run Send buffer Receive buffer Number of bytes DT100 K19 J DT200 K16 received d DT101 H30 0 H25 96 transmitted DT201 H30 0 H31 96 DT102 H23 4 1 1 DT202 32 H31 1 DT103 H44 D H52 R DT203 H34 D H33 R Received data is 07104 0 H44 D DT204 H34 4 H36 6 stored in order from DT105 H30 0 H30 0 DT205 H30 0 H30 0 the Jower order byte DT106 H30 0 H30 0 DT206 H38 8 H43 C DT107 H30 0 H30 0 DT207 H30 0 H30 0 DT108 H30 0 H30 0 DT208 H46 F H36 6 DT109 H2A H31 1 Statuses when reception is completed DT110 H2A Statuses before transmission Contents of the response If K100 is stored in DTO and K200 is stored in DT1 of the FP series PLC on the other end 01 RD6400C8006F y is returned from the FP series PLC on the other end as the response when the program is executed The received data is stored in the data reg
290. rmat 10 4 Data Format Remember the following when accessing data in the FPX send and receive buffers e Data in the send and receive buffers that is being sent and received is in ASCII code e lf a header has been chosen in the transmission format settings the code STX H02 will automatically be added at the beginning of the data being sent e Aterminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent e There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer Sending data Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is M Example data 12345 is transmitted as an ASCII code to a device with RS232C port Data sent using the F95 ASC instruction should be converted to ASCII code data Conversion to ASCII code 12345 Data to be transmitted JL Conversion to ASCII code H 31 32 33 34 35 Coded data 1 2 3 4 5 If DT100 is being used as the send buffer data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register DT101 in two byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte DT103 DT102 DT101 Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 10 32 FP 10 4 Data Format Receiving data data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data Example data 12345 is transmitted from a device with RS232C port If DT200 is being
291. rogress HSC_ CHO Flag Sexe grees 1 I N PosOperDone Teo 5s x Near iir c Sensorin HSC CHO EnHome 52 Start Operation 52 7 77 FP 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 5 6 JOG Operation Plus Direction While XB JOGStartPlus is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CW output YO PulseOutCW of the specified channel CHO YO is used implicitly by F172_SPDH Pulse output diagram XB JOG command of side side oa i Motor 300Hz i OHz FPWIN GR XB Data table 1 Drsao Frequency speed 300 Hz Control code Duty 1 4 2596 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental counting CW F172 PLSH The data table headed by DT300 is used and Pulse output instruction JOG operation pulses are output from CHO The data table headed by DT300 is used Pulses are output from CHO 7 78 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro The GVL shown on page 7 62 applies to this program DUT s JOG DUT ghest WORD fixed to 0000 owest WORD Control code POU Header VAR EXTERNAL _ 5 VAR EXTERNAL i Control Code 1110 Frequency 300 25 duty i 48 Hz to 100 kHz 0 Incremental Cw LD Body JOGStartPlus n ss ataTable1 Control Code SEM eo o o o o on s D See Were Sere
292. rror unit When the state of installation of an FPX N A 96MW5 90011 for FPX left side expansion expansion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit correspond ing to the unit no will turn on Monitor us ing binary display 15 11 7 3 2 1 O bit no T 1 3 2 1 0 unit no on error off normal DT90012 Not used 96MW5 90012 DT90013 Not used MW5 90013 DT90014 Operation auxiliary register for One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored MW5 90014 data shift instruction in bit positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction F105 BSR or F106 BSL is executed The value can be read and written by ex ecuting the FO MV instruction DT90015 Operation auxiliary register for The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in 96MW5 90015 division instruction DT90015 when the division instruction F32 96 or F52 instruction is exe cuted The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT90016 DT90015 and DT90016 when the division MW5 90016 instruction F33 D or F53 DB is ex ecuted The value can be read and writ ten by executing the FO MV instruction DT90017 Operation error address After commencing operation the address MW5 90017 hold type where the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using deci mal display DT90018 Operation error address The address where an operation error 96MW5 90018 non hold type occurred is stored Eac
293. rs B 7 B 3 4 of System Registers B 8 B 4 Table of Special Internal B 13 B 5 Table of Special Data Registers B 20 BS Table of Error Codes B 35 Syntax Check Error Codes B 35 B 6 2 Self Diagnostic Error B 36 B7 Table of Wee 2 B 37 B 7 1 Table of Basic 5 5 B 37 B 7 2 Table of High Level 1 5 5 B 44 8 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands B 60 BO HexadecimalBinaryBUD B 61 B10 ASCI Codes 554 554555 535 558 8 8 nd dri RR B 62 Index Record of Changes XV Table of Contents xvi Chapter 1 Overview FP x 1 1 Main Features 1 1 Main Features The FPx Sigma is a small size PLC programmable logic controller with great performance It can be expanded by up to three expansion or intelligent units The controller uses the comprehensive Matsushita instruction set and is programmed with FPWIN GR 2 0 or higher or with FPWIN Pro 4 0 or higher With FPWIN Pro programming according to IEC 61131 3 is also possible The FP offers the follo
294. ry error Selectable The voltage of the backup battery decreased or the battery is not con nected to the control unit Check the connection of the backup battery and replace the bat tery if necessary This self diagnostic error can be set with system register 4 in this case the ERROR ALARM LED flashes Self diag nostic error set by F148 Stops ERR instruction Continues The self diagnostic error specified by the F148 ERR instruction occurred Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose B 36 FP B 7 Table of Instructions B 7 Table of Instructions This section contains the tables of basic and high level instructions of the Matsushita library NAiS Control FPWIN Pro also offers the IEC standard library which includes all IEC operators functions and function blocks e g IEC timers Floating point arithmetic according to IEC 6113 3 is supported Please refer to the FPWIN Pro online help or the FP programming manual for detailed information B 7 1 Table of Basic Instructions Sequence basic instructions Start XYRLTC Begins a logic operation with a Form A normally open contact Start Not Begins a logic operation with a Form normally closed contact Out Outputs the operated result to the specified output Not 7 Inverts the operated result to this instruction AND XYRLTC Connec
295. s No Name Data shift instruction Data table shift out and compress Boolean Operand Description D1 D2 D3 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 Data table shift in and compress S D1 D2 Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 Right shift of n bits in a 16 bit data Shifts the n bits of D to the right Left shift of n bits in a 16 bit data Shifts the bits of to the left Right shift of n bits in a 32 bit data Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the right Left shift of n bits in a 32 bit data Shifts the bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the left Right shift of one hexadeci mal digit 4 bit Shifts the one digit of data of D to the right Left shift of one hexadeci mal digit 4 bit Shifts the one digit of data of D to the left Right shift of multiple bits n bits D1 D2 n Shifts the bits of data range by D1 and D2 to the right Left shift of multiple bits n bits D1 D2 n Shifts the bits of data range by D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one word 1
296. s right side 1 S2 D These instructions retrieve a specified number of char acters from the right side of the character string Retrieving data from character strings left side 51 S2 D These instructions retrieve a specified number of char acters from the left side of the character string Retrieving a character string from a charac ter string 1 S2 3 D These instructions retrieve a character string consist ing of a specified number of characters from the speci fied position in the character string Writing a char acter string to a character string 1 S2 D n These instructions write a specified number of charac ters from a character string to a specified position in the character string Replacing character strings A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten starting from a specified position in the character string B 54 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions No Name Maximum value word data 16 bit Boolean Operand Description Integer type data processing instructions Searches the maximum value in the word data table between the S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored D 1 Maximum value double word data 32 bit 1 S2 D Searches for the maximum value in the double word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores
297. s X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 FPO E16YT E16YP Output 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F FPO E16R E16T E16P 2 2 4 3 2 FPO Analog Unit The allocation of the FPO analog I O unit 21 is determined by the installation location Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit2 Expansion unit 3 CHO 16 points WX2 X20 to X2F WXA X40 to X4F WXE6 X60 to X6F CH1 16 points WXG3 X30 to X3F WX5 X50 to X5F WX7 X70 to X7F Output 16 points WY2 Y20 to Y2F WYA Y40 to Y4F WY6 Y60 to Y6F Input 4 5 FP 4 3 O Allocation for FPO Units 4 3 3 FPO A D Conversion Unit The allocation of the FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 is determined by the installation location The data for the various channels is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data see FPO A D Converter Unit Technical Manual Expansion unit1 Expansion unit2 Expansion unit 3 CHO 16 points CH2 16 points 16 points WX X20 to X2F WXA X40 to WX6 X60 to X6F CH6 16 points CH1 16 points CH3 16 points 16 points CH7 16 points WX3 X30
298. s a missing station number the transmission time will be longer e If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest station number in system register no 47 e For all PLCs which are linked the same value should be set for the largest station number e If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest station number has not been set default 16 or the largest station number has been set but the station number settings are not consecutive or the station number settings are consecutive but there is a station for which the power supply has not been turned on the response time for the PLC link the link transmission cycle will be longer For further information please refer to page 11 18 PLC Link Response Time 11 13 FPX 11 8 Monitoring 11 3 Monitoring When using a PLC link the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays Transmission assurance relays R9060 to R906F correspond to station no 1 to 16 If the transmission data from a different station is being used with the various PLCs check to make sure the transmission assurance relay for the target station is on before using the data Relay 9060 R9061 R9062 R9063 R9064 R9065 R9066 R9067 R9068 R9069 906 906 R906C R906D R906E R906F Station no 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 16 Conditions ON When the PLC link is
299. s cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address 10 36 FP 10 6 Flag Operation in Serial Communication If there are two headers data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer The reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is turned off by the F159 MTRN instruction Therefore if F159 MTRN is executed at the same time the terminator is received the reception done flag will not be detected Sending data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Transmitted data ST a b ST i i Transmission Transmission Transmission 01 done flag R9039 or R9049 e off F159 MTRN on Duplex transmis instruction sion disabled white execution off F159 MTRN is be ing executed Send buffer mira A slait b b 4 d e e a Number of bytes not yet transmitted lt 2 gt lt 1 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 3 gt lt 2 gt lt 1 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Transmission pointer Header STX and terminator ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted The data is transmitted to an external device When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed
300. s per common 8 points common Response time off on Approx 10 ms on gt off Approx 8 ms Mechanical lifetime Min 20 000 000 operations Electrical lifetime Min 100 000 operations Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED display Limitations on the number of output points which are simultaneously ON Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature C24R Number of points per at 24 V DC Mer are at 26 4 V DC simultaneous ON 46 48 55 114 8118 4 131 0 Ambient temperature C F Internal circuit diagram C24R 3 o T c o 2 2 10 FP 2 4 Terminal Layout Diagrams 2 4 Terminal Layout Diagrams Below are the terminal layout diagrams of the C32T C32T2 and C24R2 control units 2 4 1 C32T and C32T2 Control Units Input connector I Connector front view se Note The four COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Output connector YO 1 Ys Y9 HAY Connector front view e The two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally e The two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally FP 2 4 Terminal Layout Diagrams 2 4 2 C28P Control Unit Input connector se Note The four COM terminals of the input circu
301. s required on the PLC side Programs for the computer side must be based on the MEWTOCOL COM format MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation 9 1 1 Outline of Operation Command and Response Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses When the PLC receives a command it processes the command regardless of the sequence program and sends a response back to the computer MEWTOCOL COM sketch Communication is carried out in a conversational format based on the MEWTOCOL COM communication procedures Data is sent in ASCII format The computer has the first right of transmission The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and the PLC each time a message is sent 9 2 FP 9 1 Overview Computer Transmission program E Reception processing program EEG EEN Command message Response message Header Destina Text Check Termi Header Source Text Check Termi tion 1 2 3 code nator OOOO code nator D The unit number of the PLC 4 The unit number of the PLC that to which the command is sent the response being sent 9 5 Confirmation of whether or not the 2 The type of command processing was carried out suc cessfull Any settings and data re quired in order to execute 6 The
302. settings Char Bit 8 Bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 Bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the COM port enter the settings for the various items No 415 Baud Rate communication speed setting The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port click on z and select one of the values from 2400 to 115200 bps 9 7 FPS 9 1 Overview Procedure for FPWIN Pro 1 2 3 se Note Double click PLC in the project navigator Double click System Register Double click COM Port There are separate settings for COM ports 1 and 2 No 412 COM port 1 selection Select the COM port operation mode click on z and select Computer Link pz System Register COM Port 410 419 No Name Di men 410 COM port 1 unit No 412 COM port 1 selection General purpose p 412i COM port 1 modem connection PC link No 413 for COM port 1 no 414 for COM port 2 communication format setting Default settings Data length 8 Bits Panty usc ole Odd Stop bit 1 Bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist To change t
303. sion data storage area specified in S In FPWIN Pro it is more convenient to use the data type String With this data type it is easier to handle strings containing more than 12 characters Therefore Adr Of VarOffs is recommended instead of F95 ASC Adr Of VarOffs delivers only the text characters without the header characters 2 words For more information on the data type String please refer to the online help Transmission process When the execution condition of the F159 MTRN instruction turns on and the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 is on operation is as follows 1 nis preset in S The reception done flag R9038 R9048 is turned off and the reception data number is cleared to O 2 The set data is transmitted in order from the lower order byte in 5 1 of the table During transmission the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 turns off f system register 413 or 414 is set to header start code with STX the header is automatically added to the beginning of the data The terminator end code specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of the data DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 Transmission data A B IC D F R9039 on R9049 off Execution condition on RO off F159 MTRN execution During transmission During this interval the F159 MTRN instruction cannot be executed 3 When all of the specified quantity of data has be
304. speed settings XO to X2 Do not set in counter put XO as Two phase input XO X1 high speed Two phase input X1 reset counter input X2 Incremental input Incremental input XO reset input X2 Decremental input XO Decremental input X0 reset input X2 Incremental decremental input X1 Incremental decremental input X1 reset input X2 Incremental decremental control input XO X1 Incremental decremental control input XO X1 reset input X2 CH1 Do not set input X1 as high Do not set in speed counter put X1 as Incremental input X1 high speed Incremental input X1 reset counter input X2 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 reset in put X2 High speed counter operation mode CH2 Do not set input X3 as high speed settings X3 to X5 Do not set in counter put X3 as Two phase input X4 high speed Two phase input X3 X4 reset counter input X5 Incremental input X3 Incremental input X3 reset input X5 Decremental input X3 Decremental input X3 reset input X5 Incremental decremental input X3 X4 Incremental decremental input X3 X4 reset input X5 Incremental decremental control input X3 X4 Incremental decremental control input X3 X4 reset input X5 CH3 Do not set input X4 as high Do not set in speed counter put X4 as Incremental input X4 high speed Incremental input X4 reset counter input X5 Decremen
305. ss position P Xp Yp Target position E Xe Ye Let CHO be the X axis and CH2 be the Y axis Fx sin Fv Yo Center point Center position S Xs Ys Start point Current position P Xp Yp Pass point Pass position E Xe Ye End point Target position Ye Yo Fy Fv cos Fy 7 54 FPx 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN GR Pass position method R12 F1 DMV H10 DT600 F1 DMV K500 DT602 F1 DMV K8660 DT604 F1 DMV K9396 DTe08 F1 DMV K 5000 DT606 F1 DMV K 3420 DT610 F176 SPCH DTeo0 Assume that the execution conditions for this instruction always hold When the execution conditions are off pulse output stops FPWIN Pro Pass position method DUT The following DUT is predefined in the Matsushita Lib library amp PULSE ARC PASS DUT Comment Control Code f DWORD 9 16400000000 IN Control code Bit 16 FALSE Stop TRUE Continue Bit 12 FALSE CW right TRUE CCW left Bit 8 FALSE Pass TRUE Center Bit 4 FALSE Incremental TRUE absolut Speed IN X axis CHO target position 8388608 to 8388507 IN Y axis CH2 pass position 3388608 to 8388607 OUT Y axis CH2 center position ahr eatery eu US ded eel BILLET EA RES pL NRL oaeee POU Header Initial
306. stance of 1 200 m are possible E The FPX provides a SYS instruction which can be used to change the time between when an instruction is received and a response returned SYS1 instruction Delay response by scan time n bChangeResponseT sys4 EN ENO COM1 WAITIO s WAITO to WAITSSS possible m NES H L svs 1 010999 Iu 8 8 FP 8 2 Device Description PLC link function see note 1 Communication method Token bus Transmission method Floating master Transmission line Twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission distance Total length 1 200 m 3 937 ft Transmission speed Baud rate 115 2 k bit s Number of units stations Max 16 units stations see note 2 PLC link capacity Link relay 1 024 points link register 128 words Interface Conforming to RS485 connection using terminal block 0527 Notes 1 For PLC link the RS485 type communication cassette is required 2 Unit station numbers are specified using the switches on the control unit or the system registers 8 9 gt 8 3 Installation 8 3 Installation The communication cassette is easily attached to the 0527 Note Turn off the power supply to the control unit before installing the communication cassette Procedure 1 Remove cover using screwdriver 2 Install communication cassette
307. stem Register COM Port 410 419 tem Name 410 COM port 1 unit No 412i COM port 1 selection No 413 for port 1 no 414 for port 2 communication format setting Default settings Data length 8 Bits Parity Odd Stop bit 1 Bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Enter the appropriate settings to match the communication format of the external device connected to the COM port No 415 baud rate The default baud rate for the various ports is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port click on z and select one of the values from 2400 to 115200 bps No 416 for COM port 1 no 418 for COM port 2 starting address receive buffer No 417 for COM port 1 no 419 for COM port 2 receive buffer capacity To use general purpose serial communication the receive buffer must be specified By default the entire data register area is defined as the receive buffer To change this area specify the starting address using system register no 416 no 418 for COM port 2 and the volume number of words using no 417 no 419 for COM port 2 The receive buffer layout is shown below see page 10 7 FPX 10 1 Overview Receive buffer layout Receive buffer Starting area specified in The number of system register no 416 gt received bytes is no 418 stored h
308. sushita IEC R9030 96 MX0 903 0 Not used Description R9031 96 MX0 903 1 Not used R9032 96 MX0 903 2 COM port 1 communication mode flag Turns on when the general purpose communication function is be ing used Goes off when the MEWTOCOL COM or the PLC link function is being used R9033 96 MX0 903 3 Print instruction execution flag Off Printing is not executed On Execution is in progress R9034 96 MX0 903 4 Run overwrite complete flag Goes on for only the first scan following completion of a rewrite dur ing RUN operation R9035 96 MX0 903 5 Not used R9036 96 MX0 903 6 Not used R9037 96 MX0 903 7 COM port 1 communication error flag Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data communication Goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction R9038 96 MX0 903 8 COM port 1 reception done flag during general purpose serial communication Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication R9039 96 MX0 903 9 COM port 1 transmission done flag during general purpose serial communication Goes on when transmission has been completed in general purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose serial communication R903A 0 903 10 High speed counter CHO control flag Turns on while the high speed counter instructions F16
309. t It is possible to use the FPO series I O expansion units high level units and power units with the 1 2 4 Communication Cassette A detachable communication cassette optional should be used when using functions such as computer link serial data communication and PLC link Description FP gt communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a five wire cassette RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and general purpose FPG COM1 1 channel RS232C type serial communication RS CS control is possible FP communication This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a three wire cassette 2 channel RS232C type RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible FPG COM2 communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a two wire cassette RS485 port It supports 1 N computer links C NET general pur FPG COMS 1 channel RS485 type pose serial communication and a PLC link 1 5 FP 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations By adding expansion units the number of I O points can be increased However the maximum number of expansion units per control unit is limited 1 3 1 Restrictions on FPO Expansion Units A maximum of three FPO expansion units or FPO intelligent units or a combination of the two
310. t 1 gt 2 3 received Write pointer Number of bytes received is instruction is executed lt Write pointer cleared when F159 MTRN For general purpose serial communication half duplex transmission must be used Reception is disabled when the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address Also when F159 MTRN is executed the error flag R9037 or R9047 the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 and the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 go off Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 must be observed 10 35 FP 10 6 Flag Operation in Serial Communication Reception stops if the error flag R9037 or R9047 goes on To resume reception execute the F159 MTRN instruction which turns off the error flag 0527 Note Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program 10 6 2 Header STX Terminator ETX Receiving data The reception done
311. t for a timer counter Write timer counter set value area Writes a timer counter setting value Read timer counter elapsed value area Reads the timer counter elapsed value Write timer counter elapsed value area Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored Registers the contact to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored Registers the data to be monitored Monitoring start Monitors a registered contact or data Preset contact area fill command Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 point on and off pattern Preset data area fill command Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Remote control Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Abort Aborts communication B 60 FPS B 9 Hexadecimal Binary BCD B 9 Hexadecimal Binary BCD Hexadecimal Binary data 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0111 BCD data Binary Coded Decimal 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0
312. t value need to be specified The instruction F176 SPCH is available for circular interpolation control The user can select one of two arc forming methods one by specifying a pass position and the other by specifying a center position 0527 Notes e When using the pulse output instructions F171 F172 F174 and F175 specify the initial frequency to 30 kHz or less Otherwise the first pulse may be lost e The linear interpolation control instruction F175 SPSH and circular interpolation control instruction F176 SPCH can only be used with transistor output type control unit version 2 or higher Setting system registers When using the pulse output function set the channels with system registers 400 and 401 to High speed counter HSC not used FPWIN Pro Do not use high speed counter FPWIN GR 7 26 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 1 Pulse Output Methods Clockwise counter clockwise output method p Forward gt Reverse v1 3 LE FU L Incremental counting Decremental counting Control is carried out using two pulses a forward rotation pulse and a reverse rotation pulse Pulse direction output method forward OFF reverse ON Forward Reverse vo ULUL L N Rotation Y1 DEE 9 direction direction Incremental counting Decremental counting Control is carried out using one pulse
313. ta Store the number of on 1 bits in the data of S in D Number of on 1 bits in 32 bit data Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary timer 16 bit STMR D Store the number of on 1 bits in the data of S 1 S in D Turn on the specified output and R900D after set value S x 0 01 sec B 50 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions Name Special instructions Hours minutes and seconds data to seconds data Boolean Operand Description Converts the hour minute and second data of S 1 S to seconds data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Seconds data to hours minutes and seconds data Converts the seconds data of S 1 S to hour minute and second data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Carry flag set Turns on the carry flag R9009 Carry flag reset Turns off the carry flag R9009 Partial I O update Updates the I O from the number specified by D1 to the number specified by D2 Only possible for I O numbers in a range of to XF and YO to YF Printout Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with S for printing and outputs it to the word external out put relay WY specified by D Self diagnostic error set n n K100 to K299 Stores the self diagnostic error number n in DT90000 turns R9000 on and turns on the ERROR ALARM LED
314. tal input X4 Decremental input X4 reset in put X5 B 9 FPS B 3 System Registers Default Descriptions value Not set X1 X2 X5 X6 X7 Specify the input contacts used as pulse catch input 0527 Notes Interrupt input settings Not set X1 X2 X4 X5 X6 X7 Specify the input contacts used as interrupt input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Specify the effective interrupt edge When set on off is valid If the operation mode is set to two phase incremental decremental or incremental decremental control the setting for CH1 is invalid in part 2 of system register 400 and the setting for CH3 is invalid in part 2 of system register 401 If reset input settings overlap the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401 The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 402 and 403 If system registers 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective 1 High speed counter 2 Pulse catch 3 Interrupt input This means the counter keeps counting even after an interrupt However the response time of the high speed counter is about 100 us that of the pulse catch input is about 200 us Therefore the interrupt is recognized quickly enough FPS B 3 System Registers Unit n
315. tes e If no response is returned the command may not have arrived at the PLC or the PLC may not be functioning Check to make sure all of the communication specifications e g baud rate data length and parity match between the computer and the PLC e Ifthe response contains instead of a the command was not processed successfully The response will contain a communication error code Check the meaning of the error code e Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response see below This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear z Same lt gt Same em Ter 9 5 FPS 9 1 Overview 9 1 3 Commands Read contact area Reads the on and off status of contacts Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Write contact area Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area Reads the contents of a data area Write data area Writes data to a data area Read timer counter set value area Reads the value set for a timer counter Write timer counter set value area Writes a timer counter setting value Read timer counter elapsed value area Reads the timer counter elapsed value Write timer counter elapsed v
316. that the path to the target position forms a straight line Pulse output Arc interpola tion Se Note Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc The elapsed value area varies depending on the channel being used B 52 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions No Name Boolean Operand Description Basic function instruction F183 Auxiliary timer 32 bit DSTM Data transfer instructions Three 16 bit data move S D Turn on the specified output and R900D after set value S x 0 01 sec D S2 gt 0 1 S3 0 2 Three 32 bit data move Logic operation instructions 32 bit data AND 1 S2 D 141 51 gt S341 53 gt D 1 D S2 1 S2 D 5 D 4 D 3 D 2 S1 1 S1 S2 1 2 gt 0 1 D 32 bit data OR 51 S2 D 8141 51 y S241 S2 0 1 D 32 bit data XOR 51 S2 D S141 1 52 1 S2 V S1 1 S1 A S2 1 S2 32 bit data XNR 1 S2 D D 1 D 61 1 1 S241 S2 1 1 51 2 0 1 D S241 Double word 32 bit data unites Data conversion instructions 16 bit binary data gt Gray code conversion 1 S2 3 D 61 1 S1 63 1 S3 v 52 1 S2 0 1 D 53 1 53 Converts the 16 bit binary data of S to gray codes and the convert
317. the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 goes off Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 must be observed 10 37 gt 10 7 Changing Communication Mode of COM Port 10 7 Changing Communication Mode of COM Port An F159 MTRN instruction can be executed to change between general purpose serial communication mode and computer link mode To do so specify H8000 for n the number of transmission bytes and execute the instruction FPWIN GR Changing from general purpose to Changing from computer link to computer link general purpose RO R9032 RO R9032 Hor H F 9 1 Hor 1 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 Set to H8000 Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed Specify the port to be changed The RS232C port selection flag in R9032 or R9042 turns on when general purpose serial communication mode is selected FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier Type Initial Comment i Switches System Register 412 ifrom computer link to general ort or vice versa COMPortSwitch i WORD 63000 1 Changing COM 1 from general purpose to computer link mode Transmission mode flag R9032 COM1 R9042 COM2 turns on when general purpose is selected SwitchToCompLlink R9032 gt F159_MTRN
318. tion forward on reverse off Frequency Hz K constant 1 5 Hz to 9 8 KHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 48 Hz to 100 KHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 191 Hz to 100 KHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Specify the initial frequency to 30 kHz or less Acceleration deceleration time ms K constant With 30 steps K30 to K32767 With 60 steps K36 to K32767 Target value K constant K 2147483648 to K2147483647 Acceleration deceleration time setting Set the acceleration deceleration time so that it is the same or greater than the value of the following formula Acceleration deceleration time t ms gt Steps x 100 Frequency f Hz Depending on the number of steps the acceleration deceleration time may sometimes be longer than the set value Example According to the following calculation when the acceleration deceleration time is 100 ms and the number of steps is 30 the actual acceleration deceleration time will be 120 ms 100 ms 30 steps 3 3 ms 4 ms 4 ms x 30 steps 120 ms 7 31 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN GR X8 HDF F1 DMV H1100 DT100 F1 DMV K500 DT102 F1 DMV K5000 DT104 F1 DMV K10000 DT108 F1 DMV KO DT110 4 c3 L3 44 cu 3 F1 DMV K300 DT106 F171 SPDH DT100 KO FPWIN Pro DUT F171 DU
319. tion Specifications 1 1 serial communication see note 1 Communication method Half duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line RS232C Transmission distance Total length 15 m 49 21 ft Transmission speed Baud rate 2 400 bit s to 115 2 k bit s see note 2 Transmission code ASCII Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit parity none even odd Transmission data format data length character bits 7 bit 8 bit see note 2 Start codes NOSTX STX end codes CR CR LF None ETX Interface Conforming to RS232C connection using terminal block 58 Notes 1 For 1 1 serial communication the RS232C type communication cassette is required Additionally re send processing is recommended 2 Transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are specified in the system registers 1 N serial communication see note 1 Se a ee Communication method Two wire half duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission distance Total length Max 1 200 m 3 937 ft see notes 4 and 5 2 400 bit s to 115 2 k bit s 19 200 bit s when a C NET adapter is connected see notes 2 4 and 5 Transmission code ASCII Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit parity none even odd Transmission data format data length character bits 7 bit 8 bit see note 2 Start codes NOSTX
320. tion at hand Item Description Baud rate 19200 bps 8 bits 1 bit fixed Odd Data length Stop bit Parity bit Communication condition settings are specified using the parameter settings for the GT10 GT30 and the GT Configuration item in the GTWIN screen creation tool For detailed information please see the technical manual for the GT10 GT30 Basic Setup Communication Parameters Auto Paging Start up Screen Setup Hold Device Value OK Port Connected to PLC External Device Baud Rate 19200 bps Handle Communication Error Data Length 8 x bit Retry 3times 2 seconds Setup ps Stop Bits bit Display Error Codes Yes Unhold Parity Bit odd TOOL Port Gonnected to GTWIN Baud Rate 9200 bps Data Length bit 5 fT Parity Bit odd Through Function Forward only to the selected unit Connection to the programmable display GT10 GT30 e Using 1 channel RS232C type communication cassette FPZ side 5 Ro Received Data Request to Send GT10 GT30 side 5 SD C FP 9 2 Connection Examples e Using 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette FPZ side 5 GT10 GT30 side 5 pin Pin mo gt mr Daai m5 Sz Tasmana 50 SG Rz Receved Data RD 5 _ Signal Ground se To other device Basi
321. tion ready R9038 off Device with RS232 port Data table for reception receive buffer The received number of DT200 bytes is stored as data is DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive Stored buffer System register settings are as fol DT201 H42 B H41 A lows Received data is stored in System register 416 K200 n 2 order from the lower order System register 417 KS DT203 H46 F H45 E Pyte DT204 H48 H H47 G Receive buffer when reception is completed 10 13 FP 10 2 Communication with External Devices Explanation of data table Data sent from an external device connected to the RS232C port is stored in the data registers that have been set as the receive buffer Specify the data registers in system registers 416 to 419 The number of bytes received is stored in this area Reception data storage area The circled numbers indicate the order of storage The number of bytes of data received is stored in the starting address of the receive buffer The initial value is 0 Received data is stored in the received data storage area in order from the lower order byte Reception process When the reception done flag R9038 R9048 is off operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device The R9038 R9048 flag is off during the first scan after RUN 1 Incoming data is stored in order from the lower order byte of the 2nd word ar
322. to X3F WX5 X50 to X5F X70 to X7F 4 3 4 FPO Thermocouple Input Unit The allocation of the FPO thermocouple input unit FPO TCA FPO TCS8 is determined by the installation location The data for the various channels is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data Expansion unit1 Expansion unit2 Expansion unit 3 CHO 16 points CH2 16 points 16 points CH6 16 points CH1 16 points CH3 16 points 16 points CH7 16 points WX X20 to X2F WXA X40 to WX6 X60 to X6F WX3 X30 to X3F WX5 X50 to X5F X70 to X7F 4 3 5 _ I O Link Unit The allocation of the FPO 1 0 link unit FPO IOL is determined by the installation location Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3 Input 32 points X20 to X40 to X5F X60 to X7F Output 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F 4 6 Chapter 5 Installation FP 5 1 Important Notes 5 1 Important Notes Please read the following notes carefully before installing the FP 587 Notes e Avoid installing the unit in the following locations Ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Ambient humidity outside the range of 30 6 to 85 RH Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gases Excessive
323. torage humidity 30 to 85 RH non condensing Breakdown Between input output terminals and power supply terminal 500 VAC for 1 minute voltage function earth Between input terminal and output terminal Between input terminals XO to X7 input terminals X8 to 500 VAC for 1 minute XF and power supply terminal function earth Between output terminals and power supply terminal func 1500 VAC for 1 minute tion earth Between input terminals XO to X7 and input terminals X8 500 VAC for 1 minute to XF Between input terminals XO to X7 input terminals X8 to 1500 VAC for 1 minute XF and output terminals Insulation Between input output terminals and power supply terminal Min 1000 measured resistance function earth with a 500 V DC megger Between input terminal and output terminal Between input terminals XO to X7 input terminals X8 to XF and power supply terminal function earth Between output terminals and power supply terminal func tion earth Between input terminals XO to X7 and input terminals X8 to XF Between input terminals XO to X7 input terminals X8 to XF and output terminals Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75 mm 0 030 in 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 98 m s or more 4 times on 3 axes Noise immunity 1 000 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1 us based on in house measurements Operating cond
324. tored here Monitor usin binary display 15 11 7 3 T 23 19 0 Bit no 16 INT no 0 interrupt disabled masked 1 interrupt enabled unmasked Reading Writing DT90026 5 90026 Not used DT90027 MW5 90027 Periodical interrupt interval INT 24 The value set by the ICTL instruction is stored KO periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s DT90028 5 90028 Not used DT90029 5 90029 Not used DT90030 MW5 90030 Message 0 DT90031 MW5 90031 Message 1 DT90032 5 90032 Message 2 DT90033 5 90033 Message 3 DT90034 MW5 90034 Message 4 DT90035 MW5 90035 se Note Message 5 The contents of the specified message are stored in these special data registers when the F149 MSG instruction is executed Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time In PROG mode the scan time for the operation is not displayed The maximum and minimum values are cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG B 22 FPS B 5 Table of Special Data Registers Address Matsushita IEC A Available N A Not available Description Reading Writing DT90036 5 90036 Not used N A DT90037 5 90037 Operation auxiliary register for search instruction F96 SRC
325. trol is possible FPG COM1 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a FPX communication cassette three wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and 2 channel RS232C type general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible FPG COM2 System register settings for gt For 1 1 communication using a computer link the system registers should be set as shown below e Settings for COM port 1 Set value COM port 1 unit number 1 COM port 1 selection of communication mode Computer link Communication format for COM port 1 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Header STX not exist Baud rate setting for COM port 1 19200 bps FP 9 2 Connection Examples e Settings for COM port 2 Set value COM port 2 unit number 1 COM port 2 selection of communication mode Computer link 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Communication format for COM port 2 Header STX not exist 19200 bps Baud rate setting for COM port 2 The communication format and baud rate communication speed should be set to match the connected programmable display Communication format settings for GT10 GT30 The factory communication format settings of the GT10 GT30 are as shown below The GT configuration settings should be changed to match the applica
326. ts a Form A normally open contact serially AND Not 2 Connects Form normally closed contact serially OR XVBLT Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel OR Not Connects Form normally closed contact parallel Alternative Inverts the output condition on off each time the out lt a gt leading edge of the trigger is detected AND stack Connects the multiple instruction blocks serially OR stack Connects the multiple instruction blocks in parallel Push stack Stores the operated result up to this instruction Read stack Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction Pop stack Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction Leading Turns on the contact for only one scan when the edge leading edge of the trigger is detected differential Trailing Turns on the contact for only one scan when the edge trailing edge of the trigger is detected differential se Note When T256 C256 and higher or R9000 and higher are used the number of steps is indicated in parentheses B 37 FP B 7 Table of Instructions Leading Turns on the contact for only one scan when the edge differ leading edge of the trigger is detected The leading ential initial edge detection is possible on the first scan execution type Set Out
327. turn off because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Two wire Bleeder type sensor resistor The OFF voltage of the input is 2 4 V therefore select the value of bleeder resistor R so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 4 V With an input impedance of 5 6 and the sensor s leakage current mA 2 4 x 5 6 lt the resistance of the bleeder resistor should be 56x1 24 kc The input impedance varies depending on the input terminal number Power supply voltage R The wattage W of the resistor is W IW In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W 6 8 FP 6 4 Input Wiring 6 4 4 LED Equipped Limit Switch If the input of the PLC does not turn off because of the leakage current from the LED equipped limit switch the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below LED Bleeder equipped resistor limit switch Power supply for input r Internal resistor of limit switch kQ The OFF voltage of the input is 2 4 V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V se lect the bleeder resistor R so that the current will be greater than ef SS AI With an input impedance of 5 6kQ the resistance R of the bleeder resistor should be 2 4 5 6 T i 56x1 24
328. type real number operation instructions Floating point S D 5 1 S D 1 D type data move Floating point 1 52 0 51 1 1 S241 S2 0 1 D type data addition Floating point 1 52 0 S141 1 S241 S2 D 1 D type data subtraction Floating point 1 52 0 51 1 51 x S241 S2 5 D 1 D type data multiplication Floating point 1 S2 D S1 1 1 S241 S2 0 1 D type data division Floating point S D SIN 5 1 S 0 1 D type data sine operation Floating point COS S 1 S 0 1 D type data co sine operation Floating point TAN 5 1 S 0 1 D type datatang ent operation Floating point 51 5 1 S 0 1 D type data arc sine operation Floating point S D COS 5 1 S D 1 D type data arccosine operation Floating point 5 1 S 0 1 D type data arctangent operation Floating point LN 5 1 S 0 1 D type data natu ral logarithm Floating point EXP S 1 S 0 1 D type data exponent B 56 FPS B 7 Table of Instructions Floating point type data logarithm Boolean Operand Description LOG S 1 S D 1 D Floating point type data power S141 1 A S241 S2 0 1 D Floating point type data square root V 9 1 S 0 1 D 16 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion Converts the 16
329. types available and the main applications of the COM ports It also contains the specifications of the different communication modes 8 2 1 Cassette Types There are three types of communication cassettes each having a particular field of application 1 channel RS232C type part no FPG COM 1 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a five wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and general purpose serial communication RS CS control is possible Terminal layout Name Signal direction SD Transmitted data Unit External device RD Received data Unit External device RS Request to Send Unit External device cs Clear to Send Unit External device SG Signal Ground When a 1 channel type cassette is used the COM 2 communications status display LED is as follows S Always R On when RS and CS terminals connected 2 channel RS232C type part no FPG COM2 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a three wire RS232C port It supports 1 1 computer links and general purpose serial communication Communication with two external devices is possible Terminal layout Signal direction Transmitted data 1 Unit External device Received data 1 Unit External device Transmitted data 2 Unit External device Received data 2 Unit External device Signal Ground 8 5 FP 8 2 Device Description 1 chann
330. uations of excess noise ground the unit to increase noise suppression For grounding purposes use wires with a minimum of 2 The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100 CORRECT INCORRECT Other device Inverter etc Other device Inverter etc 587 Notes e The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e If two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device e Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used grounding may cause problems Example Since the power supply line 24 V DC and 0 V terminal of the FPS power supply connector is connected to the function earth through a varistor the varistor may be shorted out if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and function earth 24 V DC 24 V DC ay Varistor Varistor Function 82 V C32 C28 Function 89 V earth earth FPX power supply line FPO expansion unit power supply line e Changes to Power Cable Specifications In order to improve EMC performance when using an gt intelligent expansion unit we have changed the specification to a ferrite core cable part number AFPG805 When using an FP intelligent expansion unit be sure to use a ferrite core cable part number AFPG805 6 6 FPZ 6 4 Input Wiring 6 4 Input Wiring
331. ue to modifications repairs by someone other than Matsushita Electric Works Ltd e When physical defects are due to natural disasters MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation IBM Personal Computer AT is registered trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation FP Before You Start Before You Start Installation environment Do not use the FP unit where it will be exposed to the following e Direct sunlight and ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F e Ambient humidity outside the range of 30 to 85 RH and sudden temperature changes causing condensation e inflammable or corrosive gas e Excessive vibration or shock e Excessive airborne dust metal particles or salts e Water or oil in any form including spray or mist e Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda e Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges Static electricity e Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity e In dry locations excessive static electricity can cause problems Cleaning e Do not use thinner based cleaners because they deform the unit case and fade the colors Power supplies
332. ular interpolation start Positioning Control Control Control Positioning From start flag flag flag done P2 to R21 CHO CH2 Ps start In case of R903A R903C and R904E are OFF If XB turns ON circular interpolation start From P2 to Ps start R21 H F176SPCH DT60 Ko From P2 to Ps start Data table R904E R2F Control flag XC Positioning done Positioning is controlled by R904E which we are able to confirm whether the positioning was done or not Emergency stop XC 52 1 Emergency If XC turns ON the output of the pulse is stopped stop FO MV DT90052 FO MV H2008 DT90052 FO MV H2000 DT90052 7 87 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro GVL van GLOBAL VAR GLOBAL S_PosOper Done 581110 Stop mode Center position setting method rom CHO CWto CH2 CW dir Absolute CW CCW HSC Ch2 NoSoftR No software reset Ch2 7 88 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function LD Body bPositionStart bHSC Flag gt Ww No 5 1 5 RS PosOperDone bPosOperDone dut DataTable2 bCircHnterpFlag gt gt bPosOperDone N wHSC_ChO_Clear iDT_HSC wHSC_ChO_NoSoftR HSC wHSC_Ch2_NoSoftR
333. una 00000000 00000000 NAIS 1 FP C32T Right side view all types all types O standard attachment EXPANSION CONNECTOR 2 2 FP 2 1 Parts and Functions D Status indicator LEDs Display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error LED and operation status RUN green Lights when in RUN mode and indicates that the program is being executed Flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately PROG green Lights when in PROG mode and indicates that operation has stopped Flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately ERROR ALARM red Flashes when an error is detected during the self diagnostic function Lights if a hardware error occurs or if operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated 2 RUN PROG mode switch Used to change the operation mode of the PLC RUN upward Sets RUN mode The program is executed and operation begins PROG downward Sets PROG mode Operation stops In this mode programming with tools is pos sible When performing remote switc
334. urrently operated process n Step end End of step ladder area MSTPE 4 Clear multi NERO Resets the currently operated processes n1 to ple steps 4 n2 Subroutine Executes the specified subroutine When return call ing to the main program outputs in the subrou tine program are maintained D Subroutine Indicates the start of the subroutine program n entry Subroutine Ends the subroutine program return m Interrupt Indicates the start of the interrupt program n Interrupt Ends the interrupt program return RET Interrupt Select interrupt enable disable or clear in S1 control and S2 and execute Special setting instructions Communica Change the communication conditions for the tion condi COM port or tool port based on the contents spe tions setting cified by the character constant I H opier s1 s2 1 Password Change the password specified by the PLC setting based on the contents specified by the character constant Interrupt Set the interrupt input based on the contents setting 1 J specified by the character constant PLC link Set the system setting time when a PLC link is time setting used based on the contents specified by the character constant RS485 Change the communication conditions of the response COM port or tool port for RS485 based on the time control contents specified by the character
335. ver 2 0 or higher Designate the target value setting in the range indicated below If an out of range value is designated the number of pulses output will be different than the designated value The target value setting is ignored in the no count mode 0 Mode with no target value Output method Range of target values which can be designated Incremental counting Designate a value larger than the current value Decremental counting Designate a value smaller than the current value Target value setting The FP supports two operation modes for jogging operation one in which no target value is specified and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached Normal jogging operation feed no target value specified Pulses are output in accordance with the conditions set in the data table as long as the execution condition is on Data table Pulse output diagram 1300 Control code H1110 AG OFF JOG command DT302 Frequency 300 Hz 300Hz EC DT303 2 Output stops when target value is reached only version 2 0 or higher With version 2 0 and higher of the control unit C32T2 a target value at which pulse output stops can be specified for jogging operation As shown below this mode is selected in the control code and the target value an absolute value is specified in the data table Data table Pulse output diagram Control cod H11110 XB
336. vice is completed Reception of any further data is prohibited To receive subsequent data you must execute the F159 MTRN instruction to turn off the reception done flag R9038 R9048 FPWIN GR RO L F159 MTRN DT100 K 0 K1 To repeatedly perform only reception specify KO R9038 R9048 also turns off when transmission is performed with a byte number specification The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM port 2 FPWIN Pro POU Header Class Identifier Type Initial 3 receive iBOOL will also go off when the number of transmission To repeat reception set to 0 at n bytes is set and transmission is carried out 2 10 17 FP 10 3 Connection Examples 10 3 Connection Examples The following examples demonstrate how the PLC can be connected to external devices via 1 1 general purpose serial communication 10 3 1 1 1 Communication With Micro Imagechecker The FP Micro Imagechecker A200 A100 are connected using an RS232C cable The results of the scan are stored in the data registers of the Communication mode General purpose serial ommuni n Communication mode Normal mode Start command 96SCg is sent Scan result 1012345Cg is received After the scan start code 50 has been sent from the side the scan result is returned from the Micro Imagechecker as the respons
337. watchdog timer program syntax check Clock calendar function Available year month day hour minute second and day of week however this function can only be used when a battery has been installed see note 3 Potentiometer Volume input 2 points resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 for FPG C32T C32T2 C24R2 and C28P2 only Thermistor unit 2 points resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 for 2 C32T2TM and C24R2TM only Battery life 220 days or more actual usage value approx 840 days 25 C Sug gested replacement interval 1 year Value applies when no power is supplied at all Comment storage All kinds of comments including I O comments remarks and block comments can be stored without backup battery Link function Computer link 1 1 1 N see note 4 General purpose communication 1 1 1 N see note 4 see note 5 PLC link see note 6 Other functions Program edition during RUN constant scan forced on off password floating point operation and PID processing 0527 Notes 1 If no battery is used only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R900 to R97F data registers 55 words DT32710 to DT32764 When the optional battery is used data can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers 2 The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer 3
338. wing features and functions 1 1 1 Powerful Control Capabilities All of the functions of a mid scale PLC are packed into the compact body size of the 32 type FPO A program capacity of 12 steps is provided as a standard feature So you never have to worry about how much memory is left as you are programming In addition 32 k words are reserved for data registers so large volumes of data can be compiled and multiple operations can be processed without running out of memory 1 1 2 A Full Range of Communication Functions Using the Tool port RS232C provided as a standard feature on the main unit communication can be carried out with a display panel or a computer Additionally communication cassettes with RS232C and RS485 interfaces are available as an option Installing a 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette in the FPE makes it possible to connect two devices with an RS232C port A full lineup of communication functions means you can also work with 1 N communication and the PLC link function up to 16 units Controlling two devices having an RS232C port with one FP Using the 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette Display panel Two devices with RS232C port can be connected Device with RS232C port The Tool port can be used to connect a display panel or other device Device with RS232C port gt 1 1 Main Features 1 N communication with up to 99 stations units Using t
339. z K191 to K100000 unit Hz max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Specify the initial frequency to 30 kHz or less 3 Target value K 2147483648 to K2147483647 The value of the 32 bit data specified for the target value should be within the range indicated in the table below Specification of control code Position control mode Incremental Output method Incremental counting Range of permissible target values Specifies a positive value Decremental counting Specifies a negative value Absolute Incremental counting Specifies a value larger than the current value Decremental counting Specifies a value smaller than the current value 7 41 FP gt 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN GR RO HFI DMV H 1200 DT400 Control code H1200 F1 DMV K 1000 DT402 Frequency 1 1 000Hz F1 DMV K 1000 DT404 Target value 1 1 000 pulses F1 DMV K 2500 DT406 Frequency 2 2 500Hz F1 DMV K 2000 DT408 Target value 2 2 000 pulses F1 DMV 5000 DT410 Frequency 3 5 000Hz F1 DMV K 5000 DT412 Target value 3 5 000 pulses F1 DMV K 1000 DT414 Frequency 4 1 000Hz F1 DMV 2000 DT416 Target value 4 2 000 pulses R10 F1 DMV K 0 DT418 Output pulse stops H DF F174 SPOH DT400 K0 Pulse output control 7 42 FPX 7 4 Pulse Output Function FPWIN Pro DUT a F174_DUT DUT i Frequency 1000 1

FP-Sigma User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents